(11.18) Owner’s manual Arona SEAT Arona SEAT · 2018-11-22 · Owner’s manual SEAT Arona 6F9012720BD Inglés 6F9012720BD (11.18) SEAT Arona Inglés (11.18)

Owner’s manualSEAT Arona

6F9012720BD

Ingl

és 6

F901

2720

BD (

11.18

)

SEA

T A

rona

Ing

lés

(11.18

)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve-hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoya vehicle with state-of-the-art technologyand top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-ual carefully to learn more about your vehicleso you can enjoy all its benefits in your dailydriving.

Information about handling is complementedwith instructions regarding the operation andmaintenance of the vehicle in order to ensureits safety and maintain its value. Moreover, wewant to give you valuable advice and tips todrive your vehicle efficiently and respectingthe environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 81, Important in-formation regarding the front passeng-er's airbag.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of the ve-hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some ofthe features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,backwards) in this manual refer to the traveldirection of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement for theinstruction manual. Access the instructionmanual to see the complete information andwarnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or only of-fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaranteethat the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continues onthe next page.Important warnings on the page.

More in-depth content on the page.

General information on page indicated.

Emergency information on the page.

You can access the information in this manualusing:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

®

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the environ-ment.

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Printed Instruction ManualThe printed instruction manual contains rele-vant information about the use of the vehicleand the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals containsmore in-depth information.

Digital Version of the InfotainmentSystem Manual

Fig. 1 SEAT website

The digital version is available on SEAT's offi-cial website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then “Infotainment”.

Related videos

Fig. 2 SEAT website

The operation of some of the vehicle's fea-tures can be shown as an instruction video:

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 2● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.

NoteVideo instructions are only available incertain languages.

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 19

How do you adjust the steering wheel?››› page 20

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?››› page 20

How do you turn on the exterior lights?››› page 31

How does the automatic gearbox selector leverwork? ››› page 40

How do you refuel? ››› page 46

How do you activate the windscreen wipers andwindscreen washer system? ››› page 33

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What doesthis mean? ››› page 37

Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian-gle in the vehicle? ››› page 84

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 17

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 59

Where is the vehicle tool kit located?››› page 53

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncturekit? ››› page 52

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 53

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 50

How do you change a light? ››› page 51

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 58

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 111

When should the vehicle inspection should beperformed? ››› page 115

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels onthe steering wheel perform? ››› page 119

How do you remove the luggage compartmentcover? ››› page 158

How do you drive in an economical and environ-mentally-friendly way? ››› page 244

How do you check and top up the engine oil?››› page 46

How do you check and top up the engine cool-ant? ››› page 47

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 48

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 48

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-ues? ››› page 326

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 336

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, CAR menu ››› page 34

How does the START-STOP system work?››› page 248

What parking assistants are available?››› page 284

How does the rear assist work? ››› page 292

How does the adaptive cruise control work?››› page 259

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?››› page 274

How does tyre pressure monitoring work?››› page 329

How do you open the vehicle without a key(Keyless Access)? ››› page 130

Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 144

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsThe essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Driver-side general instrument panel(left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Driver-side general instrument panel(right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Passenger-side general instrument pan-el (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Passenger-side general instrument pan-el (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 52Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 58How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 61

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Correct position of the vehicle occu-pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Why wear a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 72Seat belt tensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Safety instructions about airbags . . . . . . . . . . 76Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 87Towing or tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Changing the interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Instruments and warning/controllamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Windscreen wiper and rear window wipersystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 148Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 153Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Manual air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

5

Table of Contents

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 217Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Engine management and emission controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Emergency braking assistance system(Front Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-sistance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Parking aid parking and manoeuvring(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . 292Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Accessories and modifications to the ve-hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Accessories and modifications to the vehi-cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 315Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)* . . . . 330Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 346Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

6

The essentials

Exterior view

››› page 16››› page 46››› page 15››› page 46

1

2

3

4

››› page 58››› page 17››› page 52

5

6

7

7

The essentials

Exterior view


1

2

3

4


5

6

7

8

››› page 30››› page 53››› page 52

9

10

11

8

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)


1

2

3

4


5

6

7

8


9

10

11

12

9

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)


1

2

3

4


5

6

7

8

››› page 38››› page 20››› page 50

9

10

11

10

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

››› page 21››› page 18››› page 153

1

2

3

11

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)


1

2

3

412

The essentials

Centre console

››› page 32››› page 40

1

2

››› page 220››› page 15

3

4

››› page 34, ››› page 170››› page 41

5

6

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

13

The essentials

Interior view


1

2

3

4

››› page 19››› page 22

5

6

14

The essentials

How it works

Opening and closing

Related video

Fig. 3 Opening and clos-ing

Doors

Fig. 4 Remote control key: keys.

Fig. 5 Centre console: central locking buttons.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle usingthe key● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 4 button.● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 4 button.● Unlock rear lid: press the button ››› Fig. 4until all the turn signals on the vehicle brieflylight up.

Locking and unlocking with the centrallocking switch● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 5 button. The symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it isactivated. None of the doors can be openedfrom the outside. The doors can be openedfrom the inside by pulling the inside door han-dle.● Unlock: Press the button again ››› Fig. 5.The symbol reverts to its initial colour.

››› in Description on page 127

››› page 127

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 6 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 133.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade››› page 125. »

15

The essentials

● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening inthe cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 6(arrow) then remove the cover upwards.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder tounlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 133.● After the driver door is opened, you have 15seconds to switch on the ignition. Once thistime has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-activates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using thekey shaft ››› page 133.

Emergency locking of doors with-out door cylinder

Fig. 7 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visiblewhen the door is open) is provided on thefront passenger door.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it tothe right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Rear lid

Fig. 8 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres-sure on the handle ››› Fig. 8.

This system may or may not be operative, de-pending on the situation of the vehicle.

If the rear lid is locked then it cannot beopened, however if it is unlocked then theopening system is operative and the rear lidmay be opened.

To lock/unlock, press the button or the button ››› Fig. 4 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given ifthe boot lid is opened while the vehicle ismoving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

16

The essentials

● Open the rear lid: exert slight pressure onthe handle ››› Fig. 8. The rear lid opens auto-matically.● Close the rear lid: hold it by one of the han-dles on the interior lining and close it by push-ing gently.

››› in Opening and closing onpage 136

››› page 17

Unlocking the rear lid manually

Fig. 9 Unlocking the rear lid manually.

This allows the vehicle to be opened if thecentral locking does not work (for example, ifthe battery is flat).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Opening the rear lid from inside the lug-gage compartment● Insert the key in the groove and unlock thelocking system, turning the key from right toleft, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 9.

Related video

Fig. 10 Bonnet

Bonnet

Fig. 11 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 12 Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen. »

17

The essentials

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 11 1 .● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left onthe lever located under the bonnet, in thecentre ››› Fig. 12 2 . The arrester hooks arereleased.● Release the bonnet stay and secure it in thefixture designed for this in the bonnet.

Close the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

››› in Safety notes for work in theengine compartment on page 316

››› page 315

Controls for the windows

Fig. 13 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.

● Open the window: press the button .● Close the window: pull on the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

››› in Opening and closing theelectric windows on page 137

››› page 136

Before driving

Related video

Fig. 14 Vehicle interior

18

The essentials

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 15 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat.Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

››› in Adjusting the front seats onpage 148

1

2

3

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 16 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint.

● To raise or lower the head restraint, pressthe side button 1 and move it upwards ordownwards until it engages in the desired po-sition.

››› in Adjusting the front head re-straints on page 148

››› page 67, ››› page 148

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 17 Positioning and removing the seat beltbuckle. »

19

The essentials

Fig. 18 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders,adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should bewell centred over it, never over the neck. Theseat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on theupper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across thepelvis, never across the stomach. The seatbelt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-vis.

››› page 70

››› page 72

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the frontseats are retracted automatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Maintenance and disposal ofbelt tensioners on page 74

››› page 73

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 19 Detail of the driver door: control for theexterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob tothe corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired position,adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,

L/R

left) and the passenger side (R, right) tothe direction desired.Folding in mirrors.

››› in Electric exterior mirrors* onpage 147

››› page 147

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 20 Lever in the lower left side of the steer-ing column.

● Adjusting the position of the steering wheel:pull the ››› Fig. 20 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheelposition on page 65

20

The essentials

Airbags

Related video


Front airbags

Fig. 22 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 23 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in thesteering wheel ››› Fig. 22 and the airbag forthe front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 23. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 22 ››› Fig. 23.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the driver and the frontpassenger additional protection for the head »

21

The essentials

and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-lision.

The special design of the airbag allows thecontrolled escape of the propellant gaswhen an occupant puts pressure on the bag.Thus, the head and chest are surrounded andprotected by the airbag. After the collision,the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibil-ity.

››› page 76

Deactivating the front passengerfront airbag*

Fig. 24 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 25 Centre of the instrument panel: controllamp for deactivated front passenger airbag incentre console.

To deactivate the front passenger frontairbag:● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 24. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to the position. If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp remains lit where itsays in the centre of thedash panel ››› Fig. 25.

››› in Activation and deactivationof front passenger airbag* onpage 79

››› page 78

Side airbags*

Fig. 26 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 27 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbag on left side of vehicle.

22

The essentials

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 26. The locations are identified by thetext “AIRBAG” in the upper region of thebackrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-bag system provides additional protection forthe upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce therisk of injury to passengers to the areas of thebody facing the impact. In addition to theirnormal function of protecting the occupantsin a collision, the front and rear outer seatbelts also hold the passengers in the event ofa side collision; this is how these airbags pro-vide maximum protection.

››› in Side airbags* on page 77

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 28 Location and deployment area of thehead-protection airbag.

There is a head airbag on each side of the in-terior above the doors ››› Fig. 28. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red is covered by thehead-protection airbag when it is deployed››› Fig. 28 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-jects should never be placed or mounted inthis area ››› in Head-protection airbags*on page 78.

In the event of a side collision the curtain air-bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-hicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

››› in Head-protection airbags* onpage 78

Child seats

Related video


23

The essentials

Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag

Fig. 30 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on thepassenger-side sun blind and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 31 Airbag adhesives - version 2: on thepassenger-side sun blind and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about thepassenger airbag is located on the passeng-

er's sun visor and/or on the passenger sidedoor frame.

››› in Important information re-garding the front passenger's airbagon page 81

››› page 80

24

The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 32 On rear seats: possible assemblies of chil-dren seats.

Figure ››› Fig. 32 A shows the basic child re-straint system mounting using lower retainingrings and the upper retaining strap. Figure››› Fig. 32 B shows the child restraint systemmounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer-sal type child seats to the vehicle seatsmarked with a U in the table below.

● In the passenger seat without height regu-lation: the passenger seat must be in its rear-most position1).● In the passenger seat with height regula-tion: the passenger seat must be in its rear-most and highest position1).

To correctly use a child seat in the back, thefront backrest must be adjusted so that thereis no contact with the child seat in the back inthe case that it goes opposite to the directionof the car. In the case of front facing restraintsystems, the front backrest must be adjustedso that there is no contact with the child'sfeet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-date a child's seat and get the seat belt in aperfect position, adjust the passenger back-rest as far forward as possible1).

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment to the

car is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.

The systems include the child restraintsystem mounting with an upper retainingstrap (Top Tether) and lower anchoringpoints on the seat. »

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

25

The essentials

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

››› in Safety instructions onpage 82

26

The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/iSize and Top Tether system*

Fig. 33 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on theback of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear outer seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on eachrear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings aresecured to the seat frame and, in others, theyare secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX”

rings are located between the rear side seatbackrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 33.The Top Tether* rings are located on the rearpart of the backrests of the rear seats (be-hind the seat backrest or in the boot)››› Fig. 34.

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the tablebelow.

The body weight permitted and informationregarding sizes A to F is indicated on the labelon child seats with “universal” or “semi-uni-versal” certification.

Weight group Size class Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat


Baby carrierF ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X »

27

The essentials

Weight group Size class Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions



Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer'svehicle list into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.


28

The essentials

Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size”

Fig. 35 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 36 Rear seat: cut-out grooves.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Open the cut-out section behind themarked grooves to access the retaining rings››› Fig. 36.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize”retaining rings until the child seat is heard toengage securely. If the child seat is equippedwith Top Tether* anchor points, secure it tothe correspondent ring ››› Fig. 38. Observethe manufacturer's instructions.

● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensurethat it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Tech-nical Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions



Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U: Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

29

The essentials

Securing child seats with the TopTether* retaining straps

Fig. 37 Retainer strap: adjustment and assem-bly according to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 38 Rear part of the rear seats: securingrings for the Top Tether strap.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Place the belt under the head restraint ofthe back seat ››› Fig. 37 (depending on theinstructions of the chair itself, lift or removethe head restraint if necessary).● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 38.● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.


30

The essentials

Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 39 Ignition key positions.

Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni-tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel● Lock the steering wheel: remove the keyfrom the ignition and turn the wheel until itlocks. In vehicles with automatic transmission,in order to remove the key, move the gearshift to the P position. If necessary, press thegear shift blocking key and release it.● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key intothe ignition and turn it at the same time as thesteering wheel in the direction indicated bythe arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glowplugs reheating● Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the 2position.● Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the 1position.● Diesel vehicles : the glow plugs reheatwhen the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine● Manual transmission: press the clutch ped-al all the way down and move the gearboxlever into neutral.● Automatic transmission: press the brakepedal and move the selector lever to the Pposition or into N.● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do notpress the accelerator.

Start-Stop system*When you stop and release the clutch pedal,the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.The ignition remains switched on.

››› in Ignition key positions onpage 217

››› page 217

Lights and visibility

Related video

Fig. 40 Lights and visi-bility

Light switch

Fig. 41 Instrument console: light panel.

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 41. »

31

The essentials

Sym-bol

Ignitionswitched off

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Light off or daytimedriving light on.

The “Cominghome” and “Leav-ing home” guidelights may beswitched on.

Automatic control ofdipped beam anddaytime runninglight.

Side light on. Daylight runninglights switched on.

Dipped beamheadlight off

Dipped beamswitched on.

Fog lights: pull the switch to the first posi-tion, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: pull the switch completelyfrom positions , or .

Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it tothe position.

››› page 139

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 42 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light: right-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig-nition switched off).Main beam on: control lamp lit up onthe instrument panel.Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-trol lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

››› in Turn signal and main beamlever on page 141

››› page 140

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 43 Dashboard: switch for hazard warninglights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam● In an emergency● The vehicle has broken down● When towing or being towed

››› in Hazard warning lights onpage 143

››› page 143

32

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 44 Detail of headliner: front interior light-ing.

Knob Function

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Activating or deactivating the auto-matic door contact lights.The interior lights come on automati-cally when the vehicle is unlocked, adoor is opened or the key is removedfrom the ignition.The light goes off a few seconds afterall the doors are closed, the vehicle islocked or the ignition is switched on.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on thevehicle version.

››› page 144

Windscreen wipers and windowwiper blade

Fig. 45 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.


1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.Using the control ››› Fig. 45 A adjustthe interval (vehicles without rain sen-sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen wash-er function is activated by pushing thelever forwards, and simultaneously thewindscreen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwill wipe the window approximately ev-ery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti-vated by pressing the lever, and therear wiper starts simultaneously.

››› in Windscreen wiper and win-dow wiper on page 145

››› page 145

››› page 61

33

The essentials

Easy Connect

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 46 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 47 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

● Switch the ignition on.● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.● Press the Infotainment button / andthen the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 46,

or, press the Infotainment button / togo to the Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 47.● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Vehicle settings menu.● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

34

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 226

TyresTyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 329

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warningvalue ››› page 331

Lights

Light assist Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touchsignalling. ››› page 139

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 144

“Coming home/Leaving home”function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 141

Driver assistance

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation/deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 259

Front Assist (emergency brak-ing assistance system)

Activation/deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-play ››› page 255

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 110

Parking and ma-noeuvring

Parking and manoeuvring set-tings

Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rearsound treble ››› page 291

Ambient lighting – Background lighting, switch-off, colour ››› page 144

Mirrors and wind-screen wipers

Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking ››› page 147

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing ››› page 33

Opening and clos-ing

Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver ››› page 138

Central locking Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving, interior monitoring ››› page 127

Instrument panel –Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed dis-play, speed warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset datafor “total calculation”

››› page 108 »

35

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Date and time – Time source, time, time zone, time format, date, date format –

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil changeservice ››› page 115

Factory settingsAll Restore all settings

–Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the EasyConnect system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

36

The essentials

Warning lamps

Control and warning lamps

Fig. 48 Related video:Dash panel

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 224.

Fault in the brake system ››› page 224.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 242.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 69.

Press the foot brake ››› page 260.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn ››› page 224.

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ESC or ASR in operation››› page 226.

Fault in ASR or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ASR in operation››› page 226.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC inSport mode ››› page 226.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 226.

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 139.

Fault in the emission control system››› page 245.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR faultin the management of the diesel engine››› page 245.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 245.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 245.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 242.

Tyre monitor system ››› page 329.

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 113.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-sioners ››› page 79.

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 79.

The front passenger front airbag is activa-ted ››› page 79.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 139.

Low engine oil level ››› page 318.

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 240.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 139.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 139.

Press the foot brake ››› page 233.

Speed regulator (GRA) ››› page 250; ORspeed limiter ››› page 252; OR adaptivecruise control (ACC) ››› page 259.

Natural gas operating mode ››› page 114.

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 139.

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 106.

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 114.

Engine oil pressure ››› page 318.

Fault in the battery ››› page 324.

Electronic immobiliser active››› page 219.

Service interval display ››› page 115.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-tooth® ››› page 209. »

37

The essentials

Mobile telephone battery charge status››› page 209.

Risk of freezing ››› page 106.

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 248.

Start-Stop system unavailable››› page 248.

Low consumption driving status››› page 107.

››› in Warning symbols onpage 118

››› page 118

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*


Fig. 50 On the left of the steering column: con-troller and buttons to operate the cruise controlsystem; third lever to operate the cruise controlsystem.

38

The essentials

Function Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 50 or the third lever ››› Fig. 50 Effect

Switching on the cruise controlsystem

Move controller 1 to the position on the turn signal lever or move the thirdlever forward.

The system switches on. The last set speed of thecruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise controlsystem Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 3 on the third lever. The current speed is stored and the cruise control is

activated.

Temporarily switching off the cruisecontrol

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the position or move the thirdlever into pressure point .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speedwill be stored.

Switching on the cruise controlsystem again

Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into the pres-sure point . The set speed control is activated.

Increasing the set speed of thecruise control

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 3 on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)

and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.Press on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h(5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of thecruise control

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or move thethird lever into position to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h(1 mph) and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.Press on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h(5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph),then set it.

Switching off the cruise controlsystem

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lever intoposition . The system switches off. »

39

The essentials

››› in Cruise control operation onpage 251

››› page 250

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 51 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 51.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itdownwards, move it to the left as far as it willgo and then forwards to select reverse››› Fig. 51 R .● Release the clutch.

››› in Driving with a manual gear-box on page 232

››› page 232

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 52 Automatic transmission: selector leverpositions.

Parking lockReverse gear

PR

Neutral (idling)Drive (forward)Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) togo down a gear.

››› in Selector lever positions onpage 234

››› page 233

››› page 40

Manual release of the selector lev-er

Fig. 53 Selector lever: manual release fromposition P.

Should the power supply be interrupted,there is a manual unlocking device located

ND/S+/–

40

The essentials

under the console of the selector lever, on theright. Releasing the selector lever requires acertain degree of practical skill.

● Unlock: use the flat part of a screwdriverblade.

Removing the cover from the selector lev-er● Apply the handbrake ››› to ensure thatthe car does not move.● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-er handle.

Releasing the selector lever● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 53.

● Press the interlock button on the selectorlever and move the selector lever to posi-tion N.● After carrying out the manual release, at-tach the selector lever boot on the gearboxconsole again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-charged battery) and the vehicle has to bepushed or towed, the selector lever must firstbe moved to position N, after operating themanual release mechanism.

WARNINGThe selector lever may be moved out of po-sition P only when the handbrake is firmlyapplied. If this does not work, secure thevehicle with the brake pedal. On a slope

the vehicle could otherwise start to moveinadvertently after shifting the selector lev-er out of position P - accident risk!

Air conditioning

Related video

Fig. 54 Air conditioning

41

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic controlpanel.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

1Temperature

The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature.

2Fan

The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

3Air distribution

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.

Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost thewindscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

42

The essentials

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Seat heating buttons

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to apply the driver-side settings to the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side inorder to set a different temperature.

Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off Press the button or manually set the fan to .

››› in General notes on page 161

››› page 168

43

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* and the heating and fresh air system work?

Fig. 56 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

1Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

2Fan

Level 0: blower and manual air conditioning/heating offLevel 4: maximum fan level.

3Air distribution

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the wind-screen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

: Air distribution towards the footwell.

: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

44

The essentials

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation

Manual air conditioning: Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Manual air conditioning: Seat heating buttons

››› in General notes on page 161

››› page 164, ››› page 166

45

The essentials

Fluid level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and dieselengines 40 l, 7 l reserve

Natural gas en-ginea) approx. 11.6 kg

a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200bar.

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

Windscreen washerfluid container approx. 3 litres

Fuel

Fig. 57 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The tank flap is released electronically bymeans of the central locking and is locatedat the rear of the vehicle, on the right. Thetank holds approximately 40 litres.

Opening the fuel tank cap● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 57.

Closing the fuel tank cap● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.● Close the lid.

››› in Refuelling on page 309

››› page 308

Oil

Fig. 58 Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 59 In the engine compartment: Engine oilfiller cap.

46

The essentials

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-ted in the engine compartment››› page 317.

The oil indicator must be between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.● Add oil slowly.● At the same time, check the level to ensureyou do not add too much.● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type ofService

Specifica-tion

With particulatefilter (DPF)a)

Set Serviceand FlexibleService Inter-vals

VW 507 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you maydamage the engine.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correct en-gine oil for your vehicle in your specialisedshop. If you have to change your engine oil,use this oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change:

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00

–

–

could increase consumption and the vehicle’sCO2 emissions.

Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil toguarantee high SEAT engine performance.

››› in Changing engine oil onpage 320

››› page 318

Coolant

Fig. 60 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 317. »

47

The essentials

When the engine is cold, replace the coolantwhen the level is below .

Coolant specificationsThe engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additive G13(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives thenecessary frost protection down to -25°C(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts ofthe engine cooling system against corrosion.It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theG13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection ››› in Topping upcoolant on page 321. The mixture of G13with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green-blue) engine coolants will significantlyreduce anti-corrosion protection and should

therefore be avoided ››› in Topping upcoolant on page 321.

››› in Topping up coolant onpage 321

››› page 320

Brake fluid

Fig. 61 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser-voir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 317.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a TechnicalService.

››› in Changing the brake fluid onpage 322

››› page 321

Windscreen washer

Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: cap of thewindscreen washer tank.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment ››› page 317.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win-dows.

48

The essentials

››› in Checking and topping up thewindscreen washer reservoir wateron page 322

››› page 322

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment ››› page 317. It does not requiremaintenance. It is checked as part of the In-spection Service.

››› in Symbols and warnings onhandling the battery on page 323

››› page 323

49

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 63 On the dashboard on the driver side:lid of the fuse box.

Fig. 64 In the engine compartment: lid of thefuse box.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel● Open: remove the fuse box cover in the di-rection indicated ››› Fig. 63.● Close: click the cover back into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Raise the bonnet.● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 64● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Identifying fuses situated below the dashpanel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Colour Amp rating

Green 30

Orange 40

››› in Introduction on page 91

››› page 91

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 65 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 91.

50

The essentials

Identifying a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 65.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: Depending on the level of equipmentfitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exterior light-ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceedsthat of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go toan authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Halogen headlights. Type

Main beam headlights H7

Side light/DRL (daytime runninglight) W21W

Turn signal PY 21W

Halogen headlight withLED DRL

Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Turn signal PY 21W

Side light/DRL (daytime runninglight) LEDa)

a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have it replaced.

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are withLEDs. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorisedworkshop to have it replaced.

Bulb lighta) Left Right

Brake lights2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light P21 WLL –

Reverse light – P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi-cle. The position of lights may vary according to thecountry.

Light withLEDsa)

Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED –

Reverse light – P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi-cle. The position of lights may vary according to thecountry.

››› page 93

51

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc-ture

Related video

Fig. 66 Wheels

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface andin a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the handbrake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.● Automatic transmission: Move the selectorlever to position P.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit* ››› page 53 andthe spare wheel ››› page 330 ready.● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-ture kit

Fig. 67 Standard display: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under thefloor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 67 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 67 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 67 3 into thesealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au-tomatically.● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 67 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fillthe tyre with the contents of the sealant bot-tle.● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 67 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 67 8 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 67 6 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 67 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 154.● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 67 5 .

52

The essentials

● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).A maximum of 8 minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 67 2 to the instru-ment cluster, within the driver's visual field.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 86.

››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*on page 85

››› page 85

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 68 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 69 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: on-board tools.

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*Towline anchorageBox spanner for wheel bolts*Crank handle for jack

1

2

3

4

Jack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.

››› in Vehicle tools on page 84

››› page 84

Central trim for steel rims*

Fig. 70 Correct positioning of the centralwheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for accessto the wheel bolts. »

5

6

7

53

The essentials

Removing● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools››› Fig. 69 6 ) to one of the chambers of thecentral wheel trim.● Insert the box spanner through the hook,supporting it on the tyre and remove thewheel trim.

Fitting● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. Thebottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge shouldalign with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 70 1 .● Press the central trim firmly until it locks inwith an audible click.

NoteThere is also a valve mark on the back ofthe central wheel trim that indicates thecorrect alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 71 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over thecap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 71.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Wheel bolts

Fig. 72 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 73 Tyre change: tyre valve 1 and the cor-rect position for the anti-theft wheel lockingbolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

54

The essentials

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel bolts● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go››› Fig. 72.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› in Removing and fitting thewheel on page 56.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and shouldbe pushed fully on again after changing thetyre.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheelbolts out of the vehicle tool kit.● Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theftwheel bolt ››› Fig. 73.● Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go overthe adapter.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› in Removing and fitting thewheel on page 56.

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a differentcap. This cap only fits on anti-theft lockingbolts and is not for use with standard wheelbolts.

Important information about wheel boltsFactory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel bolts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not evenuse wheel bolts from vehicles of the samemodel.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theftlocking bolt must be threaded onto positions››› Fig. 73 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not bepossible to mount the hubcap.

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 74 Jack position points.

Fig. 75 Fitting the jack.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 74.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 75 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and the mo-bile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel isslightly lifted off the ground. »

55

The essentials

WARNING● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other SEAT mod-els could slip, with the consequent risk ofinjury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. Ifyou do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury!● The height of the parked vehicle canchange as a result of variations in tempera-ture and loading.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on thepoints designed for this purpose on thestrut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-aged.

Removing and fitting the wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelbolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel ››› .

Putting on the spare wheelWhen fitting tyres with a compulsory rotationdirection, observe the instructions in››› page 57.

● Mount the wheel.● Screw on the wheel bolts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairsusing the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Wheel bolt tightening torqueThe prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. Af-ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-que checked immediately with a torquewrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have anyrusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re-placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts havebeen tightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

WARNINGIf the wheel bolts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while drivingand cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel bolts which correspondto the rim in question.● Never use different wheel bolts.● Wheel bolts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.● Loosen the wheel bolts only about oneturn before raising the vehicle with the jack.● Never apply grease or oil to wheel boltsor to the wheel hub threads. Even if thebolts have been tightened to the prescri-bed torque, they could come loose whiledriving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel bolts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel bolts or threadscan be damaged.

56

The essentials

CAUTIONWhen removing/fitting the wheel, the rimmay hit and damage the brake disc. For thisreason, please take care and get a secondperson to assist you.

Tyres with compulsory direction ofrotation

A directional tread pattern can be identifiedby the arrows on the sidewall that point in thedirection of rotation. Always observe the di-rection of rotation indicated when fitting thewheel to guarantee optimum properties ofthis type of tyres with regard to grip, noises,wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the sparetyre* against the direction of rotation, drivewith care as this means the tyre does not of-fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-ticular importance when the road surface iswet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace thepunctured tyre as soon as possible and re-store the obligatory direction of rotation of alltyres.

Subsequent work

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap.● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-gage compartment ››› page 155.● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory››› page 329.● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile,drive carefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the frontwheels.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

● If there is a danger of being trapped de-spite having mounted the chains, it is best todisable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 226.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5mm

205/60 R16

Chains with links of maximum 9 mm205/55 R17

215/45 R18

Remove wheel covers and any integral trimring before fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free ofsnow. Driving characteristics worsen, and thewheels become damaged quickly and mayeven be rendered unusable.

WARNINGSnow chains should be correctly tightenedin accordance with the manufacturer's in-structions. This will prevent the chainscoming into contact with the wheel hous-ing.

57

The essentials

Emergency towing of the ve-hicle

Towing

Fig. 76 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage.

Fig. 77 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage.

Towline anchoragesAttach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-rages.

The towline anchorages are located underthe floor panel in the luggage compartment,next to the vehicle tools ››› page 53.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection ››› Fig. 76 or ››› Fig. 77 and tight-en it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow barIt is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-ed using a tow bar. You should only use atow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-bre or similarly elastic material.

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to thetowline anchorages provided or a towingbracket.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● The tow rope must be taut before you driveoff.● Release the clutch very carefully whenstarting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac-celerate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving styleTowing requires some experience, especiallywhen using a tow rope. Both drivers shouldrealise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex-perienced drivers should not attempt to tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-ways a risk of overloading and damaging theanchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed mustbe switched on to prevent the steering wheelfrom locking and also to allow the use of theturn signals, horn, windscreen wipers andwashers.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicleswith a manual gearbox. With an automaticgearbox, place the lever in N.

The brake servo only works when the engineis running. When not running, you must applyconsiderably more pressure to the brakepedal.

As the power assisted steering does not workif the engine is not running, you will needmore strength to steer than you normallywould.

››› in General information onpage 87

››› page 87

58

The essentials

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting itusing the battery of another vehicle››› page 59. You should only attempt totow-start a vehicle if charging the batterydoes not work. This is done by leveragingwheel movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter thecatalytic converter.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear.● Keep the clutch pressed down.● Switch the ignition on.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● As soon as the engine starts, press theclutch and move the gear lever into neutral.This helps to prevent driving into the towingvehicle.

››› in General information onpage 87

››› page 87

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leadsJump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start-Stop system.

Fig. 79 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› . »

1.

59

The essentials

Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 78.Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .In vehicles without a Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadto the negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 78.In vehicles with a Start-stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadX to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, orto the engine block itself ››› Fig. 79.Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component bol-ted to the engine block or to the engineblock itself of the vehicle with the flatbattery. Do not connect it to a point nearthe battery A .Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 315, Working in the enginecompartment.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery(12 V) and approximately the same capaci-

8.

9.

10.

11.

ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-ply could result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, batteryacid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-ted from the battery could be ignited bysparks. Danger of explosion.● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

60

The essentials

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Changing the wiper blades

Fig. 80 Wipers in service position.

Fig. 81 Changing the windscreen wiper blade.

To change the blades it is necessary to movethe wipers from the rest position into the serv-ice position.

Do not change the windscreen wipers whenout of the service position, as it could causepaint to flake off the bonnet due to frictionwith the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiperblades)● Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.● Turn the ignition on and off and then (withinapproximately 9 seconds) push the wind-screen wiper lever down (short wipe). Thewindscreen wipers will move to the serviceposition ››› Fig. 80.

Removing the wiper blade● Lift the windscreen wiper arm.● Press the securing tab down 1 ››› Fig. 81.

● Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blade● Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreenwiper arm until it clicks into place.● Place the windscreen wiper arms to theirinitial position.● Turn the ignition on, push the windscreenwiper lever down (touch wipe) and then turnthe ignition off.

››› in Changing the windscreenand rear window wiper blades onpage 87

››› page 87

61

The essentials

Changing the rear window wiperblade

Fig. 82 Removing and fitting the rear windowwiper blade.

Removing the wiper blade● Lift the wiper arm away from the glass● Slide the blade adapter in the direction ofthe arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 82 A.

Fitting the wiper blade● With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-er arm.● Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 82 Band slide the adapter along until it engages.

››› in Changing the windscreenand rear window wiper blades onpage 87

››› page 87

62

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information,tips, suggestions and warnings that youshould read and consider for both your ownsafety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documenta-tion also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured››› page 155.

– Make sure that no objects can interfere withthe pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passenger in the centralrear seat always has the head restraint inthe correct position for use.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 80.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 64.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 69.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGWhen driving safety is impaired during atrip, the risk of injury and accidents increa-ses.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

63

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,● Belt tension limiter for the front and rearside seats● belt tensioners for the front and rear seats,● front airbags,● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rearchild seat system● height-adjustable front head restraints,● Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po-sition and non-use position● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehi-cle occupants

Correct sitting position for the driv-er

Fig. 83 The proper distance between driverand steering wheel.

Fig. 84 Correct head restraint position for thedriver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the driver:

– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm between thesteering wheel and the centre of your chest››› Fig. 83.

– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-wards so that you are able to press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals to thefloor with your knees still slightly angled››› .

– Ensure that you can reach the highest pointof the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of your

1) Depending on the version/market.64

Safe driving

head, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› Fig. 84.

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Fasten your seat belt securely››› page 69.

– Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 148.

WARNING● An incorrect sitting position of the drivercan lead to severe injuries.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between the centre ofthe chest and the centre of the steeringwheel ››› Fig. 83. If distance is less than 25cm, the airbag system may not protect youproperly.● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.The workshop will help you decide if spe-cial specific modifications are necessary.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-tions. This reduces the risk of injury whenthe driver airbag is triggered.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the airbag is triggered, youmay sustain injuries to the arms, hands andhead.● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverduring sudden braking manoeuvres or anaccident, never drive with the backrest til-ted far back! The airbag system and seatbelts can only provide optimal protectionwhen the backrest is in an upright positionand the driver is wearing his or her seat beltcorrectly.● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel posi-tion

Read the additional information carefully››› page 20

WARNING● Never adjust the position of the steeringwheel when the vehicle is moving, as thiscould cause an accident.● Move the lever up firmly so the steeringwheel position does not accidentallychange during driving. risk of accident!

● Make sure you are capable of reachingand firmly holding the upper part of thesteering wheel: risk of accident!● If you adjust the steering wheel so that itpoints towards your face, the driver airbagwill not protect you properly in the event ofan accident. Make sure that the steeringwheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front pas-senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the frontpassenger:

– Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible ››› .

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› page 67.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the front passenger seat.

– Fasten your seat belt securely››› page 69. »

65

Safety

It is possible to deactivate the front passen-ger airbag in exceptional circumstances››› page 78.

Adjusting the front passenger seat››› page 19.

WARNING● An incorrect sitting position of the frontpassenger can lead to severe injuries.● Adjust the front passenger seat so thatthere is at least 25 cm between your chestand the dash panel. If distance is less than25 cm, the airbag system may not protectyou properly.● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.The workshop will help you decide if spe-cial specific modifications are necessary.● Always keep your feet in the footwellwhen the vehicle is moving; never rest themon the dash panel, out the window or on theseat. An incorrect sitting position exposesyou to an increased risk of injury in case ofa sudden braking or an accident. If the air-bag is triggered, you could sustain severeinjuries due to an incorrect sitting position.● To reduce the risk of injury to the frontpassenger in events such as sudden brak-ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav-el with the backrest tilted far back! The air-bag system and seat belts can only pro-vide optimal protection when the backrest

is in an upright position and the front pas-senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop-erly. The further the seat backrests are til-ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injurydue to incorrect positioning of the belt webor to the incorrect sitting position!● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-der to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rearseat passengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of asudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,passengers on the rear seat bench must con-sider the following:

– Sit up straight.

– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 67.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the rear seat.

– Fasten your seat belt securely››› page 69.

– Use an appropriate child restraint systemwhen you take children in the vehicle››› page 80.

WARNING● If the passengers in the rear seats are notsitting properly, they could sustain severeinjuries.● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-der to achieve maximum protection.● Seat belts can only provide optimal pro-tection when seat backrests are in an up-right position and the vehicle occupantsare wearing their seat belts correctly. Ifpassengers In the rear seats are not sittingin an upright position, the risk of injury dueto incorrect positioning of the seat belt in-creases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly when the belt webs are properly posi-tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantiallyreduce the protective function of seat beltsand increase the risk of injury due to incorrectseat belt position. As the driver, you are re-sponsible for all passengers, especially chil-dren.

– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while travelling››› .

The following list contains examples of sittingpositions that could be dangerous for all

66

Safe driving

vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,but we would like to make you aware of thisissue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo-tion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.● Never lean against the dash panel.● Never lie on the rear bench.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-well.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-gage compartment.

WARNING● Any incorrect sitting position increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Sitting in an incorrect position exposesthe vehicle occupants to severe injuries if

airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicleoccupant who has assumed an incorrectsitting position.● Before the vehicle moves, assume theproper sitting position and maintain itthroughout the trip. Before every trip, in-struct your passengers to sit properly andto stay in this position during the trip››› page 64, Correct position of the vehicleoccupants.

Correct adjustment of front headrestraints

Fig. 85 Correctly adjusted head restraint asviewed from the front and the side.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit-uations.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is, as far as possible, at the same levelas the top of your head, or at the very least,at eye level ››› Fig. 85.

WARNING● Travelling with the head restraints re-moved or improperly adjusted increasesthe risk of severe injuries. An improper ad-justment of the head restraints may causedeath in an accident and increase the riskof suffering injuries during abrupt brakingactions or unexpected manoeuvres.● The head restraints must always be ad-justed according to the height of the pas-senger.

67

Safety

Correct adjustment of rear headrestraints

Fig. 86 Head restraints in the correct position.

Fig. 87 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of the passenger protection andcan reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-dent situations

Rear head restraints– The rear head restraints have 2 positions:

use and non-use.

– One position for use (head restraint raised)››› Fig. 86. In this position, the head re-straints are used normally, protecting pas-sengers along with the rear seat belts.

– And one position for non-use (head re-straint lowered).

– To fit the head restraints in position for use,pull on the edges with both hands in the di-rection of the arrow.

WARNING● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position. See the warn-ing label located on the rear side fixed win-dow ››› Fig. 87.● Do not swap the centre rear head re-straint with either of the outer seat rearhead restraints. Risk of injury in case of anaccident!

CAUTIONNote the instructions on the adjustment ofthe head restraints ››› page 148.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-paired to the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must bepressed down thoroughly in order to stop thevehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● If the pedals are obstructed, an accidentmay occur. Risk of serious injuries.● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. This

68

Seat belts

would reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation. In the event ofa sudden driving or braking manoeuvre,you will not be able to operate the brake,clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci-dent!

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

WARNING● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.● Every vehicle occupant must properlyfasten and wear the seat belt belonging tohis or her seat. Children must be protectedwith an appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp*

Fig. 88 Dashboard: right rear seat occupiedand corresponding seat belt fastened display.

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp illuminates to remind thedriver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedsurpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedduring the drive, a warning sound will be »

69

Safety

heard for a few seconds. The warning lightwill also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 88 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.The symbol indicates that the passenger inthis seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastenedor unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-dication can be hidden by pressing the button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Anaudible warning will also be heard if the vehi-cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

The protective function of seatbelts

Fig. 89 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. These also help pre-vent uncontrolled movements that may resultin serious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seat

belts before every trip, even when "just drivingaround the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

Important safety instructions forthe use of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

70

Seat belts

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -even when driving in town. Other vehicleoccupants must also wear the seat belts atall times, otherwise they run the risk of be-ing injured.● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor-rectly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of your seat as long as the vehicle is inmotion.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt must never be twisted whileit is being worn.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.

● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts ofthe buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat beltsat regular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in anaccident and have been stretched must bereplaced by a specialised workshop. Re-newal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorageshould also be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 90 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently.

Fig. 91 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driv-er who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain: the »

71

Safety

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting onboth the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthe speed and the greater the weight, themore energy there is to be “absorbed” in anaccident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-gy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-ple are not restrained by seat belts, in theevent of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbedsolely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands. Ina frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 90.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 91.

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening yourseat belt

Fig. 92 Positioning and removing the seat beltbuckle.

72

Seat belts

Fig. 93 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Read the additional information carefully››› page 19.

Fasten your seat beltThe seat belt cannot offer its full protection ifthe seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correct-ly.● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latchplate and pull it slowly across your chest andlap.● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click››› Fig. 92.● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an auto-matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Fullfreedom of movement is permitted when theshoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-ing sudden braking, during travel in steepareas or bends and during acceleration, theautomatic retractor on the shoulder belt islocked.

The automatic belt retractors on the frontseats are fitted with seat belt tensioners››› page 73.

Releasing the seat belt● Press the red button on the belt buckle››› Fig. 92. The latch plate is released andsprings out ››› .● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat beltsSeat belts offer their maximum protection on-ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING● The seat belts offer best protection onlywhen the backrests are in an upright posi-tion and the seat belts have been fastenedproperly.● Never put the latch plate in the buckle ofanother seat. If you do this, the seat beltwill not protect you properly and the risk ofinjury is increased.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. If you do, you increasethe risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.● An incorrectly worn seat belt can causesevere injuries in the event of an accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fitcomfortably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stom-ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight ifnecessary to take up any slack.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible overthe pelvis, never across the stomach, andalways lie flat so that no pressure is exer-ted on the abdomen ››› Fig. 93.● Always engage the retractor lock whenyou are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+or 1 ››› page 80.● Read and observe the warnings››› page 70.

Seat belt tensioners*

How the seat belt tensioner works

Read the additional information carefully››› page 20 »

73

Safety

The seat belts for the front and side rear oc-cupants are equipped with belt tensioners.The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on and lateralcollisions. This retracts and tightens the seatbelts, reducing the forward motion of the oc-cupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in theevent of minor collisions, if the vehicle over-turns, or in accidents where no major forcesact on the vehicle.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belttensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, the

belt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known to thespecialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear aseat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to properly wear theseat belts at all times, not only because this isrequired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 69, Why wear a seatbelt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

74

Airbag system

thrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take intoaccount that the visible damage in a vehicleinvolved in an accident, no matter how seri-ous, is not a determining factor for the air-bags to have been triggered.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old shouldalways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or ifyou lean forward or to the side while travel-ling or assume an incorrect sitting position,there is a substantially increased risk of in-jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-ther increased if you are struck by an inflat-ing airbag.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly.● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system


The airbag system is not a substitute for theseat belts. The airbag system offers addition-al protection for the driver and passenger incombination with the seat belts.

The airbag system mainly comprises (asper vehicle equipment):● an electronic control and monitoring sys-tem (control unit)● frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

● side airbags,● curtain airbags,● a control lamp on the dash panel››› page 79.● key-operated switch for front passengerairbag,● a control lamp for disabling/enabling thefront passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 79,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision »

75

Safety

● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 64, Correctposition of the vehicle occupants.● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwise, dur-ing a frontal collision the system might nottrigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addition-al protection in the event of an accident. Afine dust may develop when the airbag de-ploys. This is normal and it is not an indicationof fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even though theaccident may cause extensive damage to thecar.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Safety instructions aboutairbags

Front airbags


WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 64, Correctposition of the vehicle occupants.● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not inany case be occupied by other passenger,pets and objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephone

76

Airbag system

mountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*


WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system istriggered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploy-ment space between them and the airbags,or allow children or other passengers totravel in this position. It is also importantnot to attach any accessories (such as cupholders) to the doors. This would impair theprotection offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with sideairbags unless the covers have been ap-proved for use in your vehicle. Because theairbag deploys from the side of the back-rest, the use of conventional seat coverswould obstruct the side airbag, seriouslyreducing the airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag com-ponents for other repairs (such as removalof the front seat) should only be performedby a specialised workshop. Otherwise,faults may occur during the airbag systemoperation.● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and curtain (head) airbagsneither the doors nor the door panels

should be modified in any way (e.g. fittingloudspeakers). If the front door is dam-aged, the airbag system may not work cor-rectly. All work carried out on the front doormust be done in a specialised workshop.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if additional loudspeak-ers or other equipment are fitted inside thedoor panels.● Any work carried out to the doors shouldbe made in an authorised specialised work-shop.

Head-protection airbags*

Read the additional information carefully››› page 23. »

77

Safety

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the curtain airbagmust be disabled in those vehicles fittedwith a screen dividing the interior of the ve-hicle. See your technical service to makethis adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should onlybe performed by a specialised workshop.

Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-bag system operation.● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-ther the doors nor the door panels shouldbe modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-speakers). If the front door is damaged, theairbag system may not work correctly. Allwork carried out on the front door must bedone in a specialised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Activation and deactivation of frontpassenger airbag*

Fig. 94 Switch for activating and deactivatingthe front passenger airbag.

Fig. 95 Centre of the instrument panel: controllamp for deactivated front passenger airbag incentre console.

78

Airbag system

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switchWhen the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front air-bag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to the position. If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp remains lit where itsays in the centre of thedash panel ››› Fig. 95.

Connect the front passenger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the front passenger door.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter,as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to the position. If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp is not lit where it says in the centre of the dashpanel ››› Fig. 95. The control lamp lightsup for 60 seconds and then goes off.

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before dis-abling the front passenger airbag! Failureto do so could result in a fault in the airbagdeactivation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru-ment

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag disabled.Check whether the airbag should remain disabled

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger airbag enabled.The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec-onds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that »

79

Safety

the airbag is deactivated. If, with the frontpassenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit together withthe control lamp on the dash panel, thereis a fault in the airbag system ››› . If the con-trol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the dis-abling of the airbag system ››› . Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbagmay deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Transporting childrensafely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 71. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-ways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seatsshown on the website as described below:

● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIXDUO Plus).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX(RÖMER KIDFIX XP©).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX(TATAKI MAXI PLUS©).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 81.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

80

Transporting children safely

Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag


Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 74.● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 76.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 78.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 82.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-

ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if it is necessary, in ex-ceptional cases, to transport a child in thefront passenger seat, the front passengerfront airbag must always be disabled››› page 78, Activation and deactivation offront passenger airbag*. If the passengerseat has a height adjustment option, moveit to the highest, most upright position. If itis a fixed seat, it should be moved to therearmost position possible.● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag,the vehicle must be taken to a technicalservice. Do not forget to reconnect the air-bag when an adult wants to sit in the frontpassenger seat.● All vehicle occupants, especially chil-dren, must assume the proper sitting posi-tion and be properly belted in while travel-ling.● Never hold children or babies on your lap,this can result in potentially fatal injuries tothe child!

● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other vehi-cle occupants.● If children assume an improper sitting po-sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex-pose themselves to greater risk of injury inthe event of a sudden braking manoeuvreor in an accident. This is particularly impor-tant if the child is travelling on the frontpassenger seat and the airbag system istriggered in an accident; as this couldcause serious injury or even death.● A suitable child seat can protect yourchild!● Never leave a child alone in the child seator inside the vehicle because depending onthe season, very high temperatures may bereached inside a parked vehicle, whichcould be fatal.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries tothe abdominal and neck areas during asudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-dent.● Do not allow the seat belt to becometwisted and the seat belt should be proper-ly in place ››› page 69.● Only one child may occupy a child seat››› page 82, Child seats. »

81

Safety

● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 133.

Child seats

Safety instructions


WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe informationand warnings concerning the use of childseats ››› page 81.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings - this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*securing rings.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats intogroups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9months)

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18months)

Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4years old)



Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the rightchild seat for your model and age group atSEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In the caseof universal approval for ISOFIX, the childseat is additionally provided with a Top Tetherbelt.

82

Transporting children safely

● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements ofuniversal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 27. If necessary, ISOFIXattachment may have to be supplementedwith a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system rather thanattaching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 25.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 30. Therings for retaining the Top Tether belt aremarked with an anchor symbol.● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.The support bracket prevents the child seatfrom tipping forward in the event of impact.Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,

available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attachingchild seatsSEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or iSize.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

83

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

Emergency warning triangle*

The use of reflective warning triangles isobligatory in emergencies in some countries.As are the first aid kit and a set of spare lightbulbs.

The warning triangle is under the storagecompartment which is located under the lug-gage compartment floor.

Note● The warning triangle is not part of the ve-hicle's standard equipment.● The warning triangle should meet legalrequirements.

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*

The first-aid kit can go in the storage com-partment which is located under the luggagecompartment floor.

The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

Note● The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisherare not part of the vehicle's standardequipment.● The first aid kit must comply with legalrequirements.● Observe the expiry date of the contentsof the first aid kit. After it has expired youshould purchase a new one.● The fire extinguisher must comply with le-gal requirements.● Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fullyfunctional. The fire extinguisher should,therefore, be checked regularly. The stickeron the fire extinguisher will inform you ofthe next date for checking.● Before acquiring accessories and emer-gency equipment see the instructions in“Accessories and spares” ››› page 307.

Vehicle tools


Depending on the equipment, the tools andanti-puncture kit* are stored under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

● Towline anchorage● Box spanner for wheel bolts*● Jack*● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel covers* /wheel bolt cap clip.

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNING● The factory-supplied jack is only de-signed for changing wheels on this model.On no account attempt to use it for liftingheavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-jury.● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.● Never start the engine when the vehicle ison the jack. Risk of accident.● If work is to be carried out underneath thevehicle, this must be secured by suitablemeans. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

84

Self-help

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*


The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if thevehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-miliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.

● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.

● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-brake lever firmly and engage gear if usinga manual gearbox, in order to reduce therisk of vehicle involuntary movement.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

Note● A new bottle of sealant can be purchasedat SEAT dealerships.● Take into account the separate instruc-tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manu-facturer.

85

Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility sys-tem*

Fig. 96 Standard display: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 96:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressorON/OFF switch

1

2

3

4

5

Air bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube).Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap atthe lower end for the valve insert. The valveinsert can only be screwed or unscrewed inthis way. This also applies to its replacementpart 11 .

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

6

7

8

9

10

11

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoidoverheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 96 8 againand check the pressure on the gauge 7 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey, without ex-ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reachthe nearest specialised workshop and re-place the tyre.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious in-jury.

86

Self-help

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades


Perfect windscreen wiper blade condition isessential for clear vision. Damaged wiperblades should be replaced immediately.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise ofthe water as it is wiped across the windscreenwill be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across theglass, they should be changed if they aredamaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should be

checked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

WARNINGDo not drive unless you have good visibilitythrough all windows!● Clean the windscreen wiper blades andall windows regularly.● The wiper blades should be changedonce or twice a year.

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows. This could damage the windscreenwiper blades.● Never move any windscreen wiper byhand. This could cause damage.● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewindscreen wiper arms, the latter shouldonly be lifted off the windscreen when inservice position.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over the

windscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

Towing or tow-starting

General information


Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with theKeyless Access system, the steering wheelcould lock up.

WARNINGIf the vehicle has no electrical power, thebrake lights, turn signals and all other »

87

Emergencies

lights will no longer function. Do not havethe vehicle towed away. Failure to followthis instruction could result in an accident.

WARNINGThe risk of accidents is high when tow-starting, for example, the towed vehiclecan easily be driven into the towing vehicle.

CAUTIONIf there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-cant in the automatic transmission the carmay only be towed with the driven wheelslifted clear of the road, or transported on aspecial car transporter or trailer.

CAUTIONDo not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m inattempt to start it. There is risk of damageto the catalytic converter.

Note● Please observe related legal require-ments.● Switch on the hazard warning lights ofboth vehicles. However, observe any regu-lations to the contrary.● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other-wise the front tow line anchorage could bepulled off the vehicle.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-started. The jump start should be used in-stead ››› page 59.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can theelectronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gear-boxes):● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.● Keep the clutch pressed down.● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle.

NoteThe vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropri-ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has nopower supply or there is an electric systemfault, the engine must be tow-started to de-activate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

88

Self-help

Anchoring the front tow line

Fig. 97 Right side of the front bumper: removethe lid.

Fig. 98 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

The front towline anchorage is only mountedif the vehicle has to be towed.

There is a cover with an opening into whichthe towline anchorage is screwed on the rightpart of the front bumper.

– Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.

– Remove the cover by pressing down on itsright-hand side until it is unclipped››› Fig. 97.

– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 98.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage andfit the cover back on the bumper. Put the tow-line anchorage back in the vehicle tool kit.The towline anchorage should always bekept in the vehicle.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: cover-cap.

Fig. 100 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

The rear towline anchorage should only bemounted if you wish to tow another vehicle.

On the right of the rear bumper there is acover which covers a threaded hole.

– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-cle tool set ››› page 84.

– Remove the cover by pressing down on itsright-hand side until it is unclipped››› Fig. 99.

– Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 100and tighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage andput it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace thecover on the bumper. The towline anchorageshould always be kept in the vehicle. »

89

Emergencies

WARNING● If the towline anchorage is not screwed inas far as the stop, there is a risk of thescrew connection shearing off during tow-ing (accident risk).● If your car has a towing bracket, only usespecial towing ropes. Risk of accident!

CAUTIONIn vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, on-ly use special tow bars to prevent damageto the ball joint. These tow bars have beenspecially approved for use with towingbrackets.

Towing vehicles with a manualgearbox

Towing is relatively straightforward.

Please observe the relevant instructions››› page 87.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h(30 mph).

Towing a vehicle equipped with au-tomatic gearbox

Certain restrictions must be observed whentowing your vehicle.

Please observe the relevant instructions››› page 87.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the ground. When doing so, pleasenote the following points:

● Make sure the selector lever is in the Nposition.● The vehicle must not be towed faster than50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engineis not running, the gearbox oil pump does notwork and the gearbox is not adequately lubri-cated for higher speeds or longer distances.

If the vehicle has to be towed with a break-down truck, it must only be suspended at thefront wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-cated on the front wheels. If the car is towedwith the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.travelling backwards), the drive shafts alsoturn backwards. The planetary gears in theautomatic gearbox then turn at such highspeeds that the gearbox will be severelydamaged in a short time.

Note● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle inthe normal way, or if it has to be towed fur-ther than 50 km (30 miles), it must betransported on a special car transporter ortrailer.● Should the power supply to the selectorlever be interrupted in position P, the selec-tor lever will be locked. Before the vehiclecan be recovered/manoeuvred you mustmanually release the selector lever.

90

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never repair a fuse.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec-tric system, before replacing a fuse alwaysturn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-trical elements and remove the key fromthe ignition.● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to anotherpart of the electrical system.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.

● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Fuses to the left of the instrumentpanel


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow Hook 20

2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow Hook 20

13Lights switch, steering column LSSand SMLS, diagnostic port,rain/light sensor

7.5 »91

Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps

14 Steering Column LSS: wiper control 10

15 Instrument panel 7.5

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 30

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated Rear Window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

24Connectivity Box, external audiosource wiring (Double USB-Aux IN),telephone amplifier, MIB display

5

25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

319AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left Lights Power Supply 40

No. Consumer/Amps

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10

40

Light switch, diagnosis input, head-lamp range regulator, LSS steeringcolumn: lamps, halogen lamps,switch, reverse gear, electrochromicmirror, RKA without radio.

7.5

41 Regulation of unfolded exterior mir-rors, 7.5

42 Clutch pedal, ignition relays, AApressure sensor 7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wipermotor, heated nozzles 15

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5

46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5

48 Steering Column Lock, Kessy Con-trol Unit 7.5

49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

58 Double Water Pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

No. Consumer/Amps

60 Tow Hook 30

61 Tow Hook 30

Fuse arrangement in engine com-partment


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

No. Consumer/Amps

1

MPI Engine Injection Module 10

TSI Engine Injection Module 15

Diesel Engine Injection Module 30

2

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7),Low temperature coolant pump(TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regu-lating Valve (TJ1), Coolant ValveAGR (TJ1), High and Low WaterBumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

4 Petrol engine pump relay (MPI),Gauge control unit (TSI and diesel) 15

92

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps

5

Pressure transducer, EPW SolenoidValve, TOG Sensor, PWM Electricfan, Camshaft Control Valve, ActiveCarbon Tank Valve and Oil PressureRegulating Valve (TSI)

10

6Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 20

Glow plug relay, Suction hose re-sistance (diesel) 7.5

7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15

8 Injectors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI),Fuel metering valve (diesel) 10

9 Servo sensor 7.5

10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM andBCM 7.5

14 Engine Injection Module, Main En-gine Relay, ESC 7.5

15 Automatic Gearbox DQ200 andAQ160 30

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 Starter Motor 30

20ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

24 TH4 Electric fan without A/C formoderate climate countries 30

No. Consumer/Amps

25TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-ate climate countries 20

PTC1 40

26 TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electricfan for warm climate countries 50

27TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-ate climate countries 30

PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40

Changing bulbs

General notes


Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is adangerous area ››› in Safety notes forwork in the engine compartment onpage 316.

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen headlights.● Full-LED main headlights*● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-ning lights*● Rear bulb light● LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beamand route light) with light emitting diodes(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs cannotbe replaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING● Take particular care when working oncomponents in the engine compartment ifthe engine is warm, there is a risk of burns.● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.● When changing bulbs, please take carenot to injure yourself on sharp parts in theheadlight housing. »

93

Emergencies

CAUTION● Remove the ignition key before workingon the electric system. Otherwise, a shortcircuit could occur.● Switch off the lights or parking lights be-fore you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environmentPlease ask your specialist retailer how todispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note● Depending on weather conditions (coldor wet), the front lights, the fog lights, thetail lights and the turn signals may be tem-porarily misted. This has no influence onthe useful life of the lighting system. Byswitching on the lights, the area throughwhich the beam of light is projected willquickly be demisted. However, the edgesmay continue to be misted.● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.● Do not touch the glass part of the bulbwith your bare hands, use a cloth or papertowel instead. The residue left by the fin-gerprints would vaporise as a result of the

heat generated by the bulb, they will bedeposited on the reflector and will impairits surface.● Depending on the level of equipment fit-ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exteriorlighting. LEDs have an estimated life thatexceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED lightfails, go to an authorised workshop for itsreplacement.

Change the front bulbs

Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 101 In the engine compartment: mainbeam lamp.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Turn the cover 1 anti-clockwise and take itout ››› Fig. 101.

– Remove the bulb connector 2 by pulling itoutwards.

– Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit thenew one.

– Fit the bulb connector 2 .

– Fit cover 1 , turning it towards the right.

– Check whether the new bulb is working.

94

Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 102 In the engine compartment: removethe lid.

Fig. 103 In the engine compartment: dippedbeam lamp.


– Move the loop ››› Fig. 102 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 103 2 .

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 103 3pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat the lug on the base fits into the recesson the reflector.

– Fit the connector.

– Fit the cover and close the strap. Make surethat the gasket sits well on the casing coverduring the operation.

– Check whether the new bulb is working.

Turn signal light and DRL (daytimerunning light)1)

Fig. 104 In the engine compartment: turn sig-nal light bulb 1 and DRL (daytime runninglight) bulb 2 .


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 104 1 or 2 tothe left and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anticlockwise at thesame time.

– Installation involves all of the above steps inreverse sequence.

1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this lightsource cannot be replaced. It is designed to lastthe length of the vehicle’s service life. In case offailure, go to an authorised workshop to have itreplaced.

95

Emergencies

Fog light bulb

Fig. 105 Fog light: remove the grille

Fig. 106 Fog light: detach the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

Lever the groove with a screwdriver››› Fig. 105 (arrow). Next, unclip the clipslocated on the edge of the grille, pullingon it.Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 106 1 andremove the fog light.

1.

2.

Remove the bulb connector 2 .Turn the bulb holder 3 to the left andpull.Remove the bulb by pressing on it andturning it anticlockwise at the same time.Replace the bulb, making sure that thefixing guides are in the right position andthen press it and turn it clockwise.To install the headlight go back throughthe above steps in reverse.Check that the bulb works properly.

Change the rear bulbs

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 107 Boot: access to the bolt securing thetail light unit.

3.4.

5.

6.

7

8.Fig. 108 Retaining tabs on reverse side of taillight.


Check which of the bulbs is defective.Open the rear lid.Remove the lid, levering the flat side of ascrewdriver into the recess››› Fig. 107 1 .Remove the bulb connector 2 .Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 byhand or using a screwdriver.Remove the light from the body, gentlypulling it toward you, and place on aclean, smooth surface.Remove the bulb holder unlocking theretaining tabs ››› Fig. 108 A .Change the damaged bulb.To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulb

1.2.3.

4.5.

6.

7.

8.9.

96

Fuses and bulbs

holder. The securing tabs must click intoplace.

CAUTIONTake care when removing the rear light unitto make sure there is no damage to thepaintwork or any of its components.

Note● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit,to avoid any scratches.● For LED lights, you can only change theturn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 109 Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 110 Remove the bulb holder.


Check which of the bulbs is defective.Open the rear lid.Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 109.Remove the bulb connector››› Fig. 110 1 .Remove the bulb holder unlocking theretaining tabs A .Change the damaged bulb.Use a cloth to remove any fingerprintsfrom the glass part of the bulb.Check that the new bulb works properly.Carry out the same actions in reverse or-der for assembly and pay special atten-tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuringthat the tabs are properly secured.

1.2.3.

4.

5.

4.6.

7.8.

Note● For LED lights, you can only change theturn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Number plate light

NoteNumber plate lights use LED technology.LEDs have an estimated life that exceedsthan that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails,go to an authorised workshop for replace-ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 111 Turn signal integrated in the rear viewmirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-grated in the rear view mirrors. »

97

Emergencies

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Given the difficulty involved in the replace-ment of this light it should be done by Techni-cal Services.

Changing the interior bulbs

Interior light and front readinglights

Fig. 112 Front reading light.

To remove the glass– Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-

ing and the glass ››› Fig. 112.

– Carefully remove the glass, levering it toavoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs– Pull the bulbs outwards.

– To remove the central bulb, hold and pressto one side.

Assembly– Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-

tly on the outer edge of the side light.

– First fit the glass with the fastening tabsover the frame of the switch. Next press thefront part until the two long tabs click onthe support.

NoteIn LED courtesy lights it is not possible toreplace the light sources. If the light doesnot work, take the vehicle to an officialService.

Luggage compartment light*

Fig. 113 Boot light.

Fig. 114 Boot light.

– Extract the bulb by pressing on its insideedge using the flat side of a screwdriver››› Fig. 113.

– Disconnect the cable.

– Press the bulb sideways and remove it fromits housing ››› Fig. 114.

98

Fuses and bulbs

– Change the bulb.

– Connect the cable again.

– Refit the bulb and press it in until it engages.

99

Operation

Fig. 115 Dash panel.

100

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displaysGeneral instrument panel

Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Door release leverControl for adjusting electric exteri-or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Air ventsLever for:– Turn signals/main beam head-

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140– Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Depending on equipment fitted:– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74– On-board computer controls . . . . . 116– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialoguesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 236

Instrument panel and warninglamps:– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

– Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 37Lever for:– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 145– Wipe and wash system* . . . . . . . . . . . 145– Multi-function display control* . . . 108Infotainment system:Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Depending on the equipment, glovecompartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153– CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 194Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Front passenger airbag disconnec-tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Switches for:– Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 164– Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166– Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Front passenger seat heating con-trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Gear lever– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:– Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129– Start-Stop operation button . . . . . . . 248– SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276– Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . 329Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-cess closing and start-up sys-tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Depending on the equipment:– USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214– Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Driver's seat heating control* . . . . . . . 150Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Lever for unlocking the bonnet . . . . . . 17Light range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras.● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 101. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

101

Operation

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Dashboard

Introduction


The vehicle can be fitted with a instrumentpanel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEATCockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructions

on the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the Info-tainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

102

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 117 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 117:

Revolution counter (with the engine run-ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-nute) ››› page 112.

1

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 114 or natural gas gauge invehicles with natural gas engine (CNG)››› page 114Displays on the screen ››› page 106.

2

3

Adjuster button and display.Speedometer.Fuel gauge ››› page 113.

4

5

6

103

Operation

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 118 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrumentpanel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:Engine coolant temperature display››› page 114Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 112.Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 106SpeedometerDigital speed displayFuel gauge ››› page 113.Information Profile ››› page 104.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrumentpanel digital with monochrome screen in col-our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi-ble using the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel. By selecting different infor-mation profiles, indications other than theclassic circular instruments can be displayed,such as navigation data, multimedia informa-tion or travel data.

The 3 views are:

Classic ViewDigital maps (no information profiles)Semicircular watches

–––

All views will display information on thescreen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

In Classic View and Semicircular watches it ispossible to customise the information dis-played under Information Profiles››› Fig. 118 8 .

Information profilesWith the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (Infotain-ment button / > Vehicle functionbutton > View > Instrument cluster)

1) Depending on the version.104


you can choose between the different dis-play options of the information that appearsin the Digital SEAT Cockpit.

Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedometerneedles appear along the entire length››› Fig. 118.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap-pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 ofthese items of information can be displayedat the same time, but the user chooses whichto display, and in what order, by moving thefinger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by exiting the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

● Consumption. Graphic representation ofthe current consumption and digital displayof the average consumption.● Audio. Digital display of the current audioplayback.● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-tude above sea level.● Compass. Digital display of the compass.

● Information about the final destination.Digital display of the remaining travellingtime, distance to the destination and the esti-mated time of arrival.● Operating range. Digital display of the re-maining range.● Travel time.● Route guidance.● Journey. Digital display of the distancetravelled.● Assistance systems. Graphic representa-tion of different assistance systems.● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-ted.● Navigation. Graphical representation ofthe navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-ber and the contents of the selectable infor-mation profiles..

Navigation system in the SEATDigital Cockpit*

Fig. 119 Infotainment system: map transferbutton

Depending on the features, the SEAT DigitalCockpit can display a detailed map. To dothis, select the Navigation option in themenu menu on the instrument panel››› page 107.

Depending on the features or the navigationmap, it can be shown in the Digital SEATCockpit or on the Infotainment system or onboth at the same time. If it is displayed only inthe Infotainment system, the SEAT DigitalCockpit will only display the arrows for ma-noeuvres. »

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Drivingmode” selected.

105

Operation

Transfer of navigation mapUsing the map transfer key ››› Fig. 119, themap is transferred from the Infotainment sys-tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver-sa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,you can transfer the map back to the Info-tainment System.

Display indications

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument panel,depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 111● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature● Indications of the compass● Selector lever positions● Gear-change recommendation››› page 240

● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 107● Service interval display ››› page 115● Speed warning ››› page 108● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 248● Indication of the status of active cylindermanagement (ACT®) ››› page 244● Low consumption driving ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● Driver assistance system display››› page 248● Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Selector lever positions (dual-clutchDSG®)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is inthe D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in

some cases, the gear engaged in each caseis shown on the instrument panel display.

Outside temperature displayIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-til the outside temperature exceeds +6°C(+43°F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux-iliary heater is switched on or when driving atvery low speeds, the outside temperature in-dicated may be higher than the actual tem-perature due to the heat produced by the en-gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45°C (-49°F) to +76°C (+169°F).

Driving recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of certainvehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-tion for saving fuel ››› page 240.

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero.

106


Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Briefly press the button 0.0/SET››› Fig. 117 4 to reset the trip recorder to 0.● Keep the button 0.0/SET 4 pressed forabout 3 seconds and the previous value willbe displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-ment system or the multifunction steeringwheel ››› page 108.

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum speed set is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 107.

The speed warning can be adjusted on theInfotainment system: using button / and the SETTINGS > Driver Assistance››› page 34 button.

Compass indicationDepending on the equipment, when the igni-tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-cates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and thereis no route guidance active, the graphic rep-resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving*Depending on the equipment, when driving,the display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consumptionstatus due to active cylinder management(ACT®)* ››› page 244.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Switch the ignition on, but do not start theengine.● Hold the button 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 117 4down for more than 15 seconds to display theidentifying letters of the vehicle engine.

CopyrightLegal text about the property rights andcopyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature is high-er than freezing temperature, some roadsand bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.● At outside temperatures above +4°C(+39°F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panels andtherefore the versions and instructions onthe display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument panelscreen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features. »

107

Operation

A specialised workshop can programme ormodify additional functions, according to thevehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 108■ Assistance systems.■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 255■ ACC (only display) ››› page 259

■ Navigation.■ Audio.■ Telephone.■ Vehicle status ››› page 110

Service Menu3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display(Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menuTo open up the Service menu, select theDriving range information profile while inthe Travel data menu, and keep the keypressed on the multifunction steering wheelfor approximately 4 seconds. When it is re-leased, the Service menu will be displayed.Now you can browse through the menu using

the keys on the multifunction steering wheelas usual.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrument pan-el display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Travel data (multifunction indica-tor)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to anotherVehicles without multifunction steering wheel:● press the rocker switch on the wind-screen wiper lever ››› page 117.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› page 118.

Changing memory (vehicles with ana-logue instrument cluster)Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

108


Changing memory (vehicles with digitalinstrument cluster)While in Travel data > General infor-mation press on the multi-function steer-ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo-ries1):

The memory is deleted if thejourney is interrupted for more than 2hours.

Display and storage ofthe journey data and the consumptionvalues collected. When refuelling, thememory is deleted.

This memory contains travel dataup to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi-nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or upto a maximum of 1999.9 km or9999.9 km. When one of these values isexceeded (varies depending on the ver-sion of the instrument panel), the memo-ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● Select the memory that you wish to erase.● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-

Since start

Since refuelling

Long-term

function wheel pressed down for about 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-cle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 34.

The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100 km;and with the engine running and the ve-hicle stopped, in litres/hour.

The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.

This indicates the hours(h) and minutes (min) since the ignitionwas switched on.

Approximate distance inkm that can still be travelled if the samedriving style is maintained.

Approxi-mate distance in km that can still betravelled with the current level of theAdBlue® tank with the same driving style.The indication appears from a range of

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Travelling time

Operating range

Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy

less than 2,400 km and cannot be de-activated.2)

Distance covered inkm (m) after switching on the ignition.

The average speed will beshown after driving for approximately100 metres.

Current speed displayed indigital format.

Displays a list ofthe connected comfort systems that in-crease energy consumption, e.g. airconditioning.

Set a speed warning● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph.● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within5 seconds using the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever or by turning thethumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel. Next, press the button or »

Distance travelled

Average speed

Digital speed

Convenience consumers

1) This will show all data on the display at thesame time: distance travelled, average con-sumption, average speed and autonomy.2) Not available in all countries.

109

Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed isstored and the warning activated.● Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h(155 mph).

Display Oil temperatureThe engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C and120°C. If the engine is under a lot of stressand the outside temperature is high, the en-gine oil temperature can increase. This doesnot present any problem as long as the warn-ing lamps or ››› page 318 do not ap-pear on the display.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults displayed on the instrument panel asred and yellow warning symbols accompa-nied with messages and ››› page 37, de-pending on the case, even an audible warn-ing. The representation of the messages and

symbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle status orVehicle ››› page 107.

The symbol lightsup or flashes (in part accompanied byaudible warnings). Stop driving! Dan-ger! Check the fault and eliminate thecause. If necessary, seek professionalassistance.

The symbollights up or flashes (in part accompa-nied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon aspossible. If necessary, seek professionalassistance.

It provides informa-tion about processes in the vehicle.

Note● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.

Priority 1 warning (red).

Priority 2 warning (yellow).

Information message.

● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Fatigue detection (break recom-mendation)*

Fig. 120 On the screen of the instrument pan-el: fatigue detection.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver whentheir driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-stantly compared with the current driving be-haviour. If the system detects that the driver is

110


tired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 120. Themessage on the instrument panel display isshown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or thebutton on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 116.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 108.

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offFatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS functionbutton ››› page 34. A mark indicatesthat the adjustment has been activated.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-

tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)● When cornering● On roads in poor condition● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-tem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.

● Never drive if you are tired.● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 111,System limitations.● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developedfor driving on motorways and well pavedroads only.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press the infotainment / button.● Press the SETTINGS function button.● Select the menu option Date and time toset the time ››› page 34. »

111

Operation

Setting the time on analogue the instru-ment panel● To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), pressand hold the button 0.0/SET on the instru-ment panel until the Time is displayed.● Release the button 0.0/SET . The time is dis-played on the instrument panel display andthe hours field is highlighted.● Afterwards, press the button 0.0/SET untilthe desired time is displayed. To scroll quick-ly, hold the button 0.0/SET .● When they have finished setting the hour,wait until the minute field is marked on the in-strument panel display.● Immediately after, press the button 0.0/SETas many times as required until the correctminute is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold thebutton 0.0/SET .● Release the button 0.0/SET in order to fin-ish setting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT DigitalCockpit● While on the Driving data menu selectRange (Infotainment button / > View >Driving data > Range).● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel until the Service menu is dis-played on the instrument panel display››› page 108.● Select the menu Time.

● Adjust the correct time by turning the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the engine hot.However, it is advisable to change up a gearor move the selector lever to D (or lift yourfoot off the accelerator) before the needlereaches the red zone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 240, Gear-changerecommendation.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

112


Fuel level indicator

Fig. 121 Analogue instrument panel: fuelgauge

Fig. 122 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as possible.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es in red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in the diesel.Switch off the engine and request the assistance ofspecialised personnel.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 46 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly or

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicleto stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towardsthe side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

113

Operation

Natural gas level (CNG)3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas en-gine (CNG)

Fig. 123 Analogue instrument panel: naturalgas gauge

Control lamp

It lights up green ››› Fig. 123 1

The vehicle is running with natural gas.The warning lamp turns off when the natural gas runsout. The engine changes to operate with petrol.

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

The fuel reserve level has been reached.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es in red.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

Things to noteIf the vehicle is left parked for a long time im-mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-el indicator may not accurately indicate thesame level shown after refuelling when thevehicle is started up again. This is not due to aleak in the system, but to a drop in pressure inthe gas tank for technical reasons after acooling phase just after refuelling.

Engine coolant temperature dis-play

Fig. 124 Analogue instrument panel: enginecoolant temperature display.

Fig. 125 Digital instrument panel: engine cool-ant temperature display.

››› Fig. 124, ››› Fig. 125:Cool zone. The engine has not reachedoperating temperature yet. Avoid high en-gine speeds and stressing the engine if ithas not reached operating temperature.Normal zone. At high outside tempera-tures and when making the engine workhard, the diodes may continue lighting upand reach the upper zone. This is nocause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work-ing hard, especially at high outside tem-peratures, the diodes may light up in thewarning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on.

A

B

C

114


Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not keep driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 320.● If the warning lamp does not switch off evenif the coolant level is correct, request assis-tance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 110 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.

● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehicleis moving. If the spoiler is damaged this canreduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display and the Infotain-ment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) andservices without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use

and individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) andthe time is given in complete days. The cur-rent service message cannot be viewed until500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Request an inspection.● Oil service required!● Oil service and inspection re-quired! »

115

Operation

Inspection of compressed natural gastanks (CNG) reminderWhen less than 90 days for the review of thecompressed natural gas tanks (CNG), whenthe ignition is switched on, the instrumentpanel display will a reminder for review ofthe gas tanks and an audible warning will beemitted.

As approaches the service date of inspectionof the gas tanks, the message and the audi-ble warning will stop modify accordingly.

Check a service warningWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press the infotainment / button.● Press the SETTINGS function button››› page 34.● Select the Service menu option to displayinformation about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Press and hold the button 0.0/SET››› Fig. 117 4 for more than 5 seconds to con-sult the service message.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 108.

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Switch off the ignition, press and hold thebutton 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 117 4 .● Switch ignition back on.● Release the button 0.0/SET and press itagain for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 108.

Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, theservice interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen OK/RESET is pressed on the wind-

screen wiper lever, or OK on the multifunc-tion steering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mind themaximum service intervals permitted››› page 333.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by a SEAT author-ised Dealer.● If the period of 48 months for an inspec-tion at a specialised workshop of com-pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee-ded, the vehicle may not working in thismode.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

116


In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only beoperated with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the windscreen wip-er lever

Fig. 126 Windscreen wipers lever: control but-tons.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 110 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button ››› Fig. 126 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press button 1 ; if necessary, several times.● To display the menus ››› page 107 or to re-turn to the selection of menus from a menu orfrom an informative display, hold down therocker button 2 .● To change from one menu to another, pressthe upper or lower part of the rocker switch.

● To open the menu or the informative displayshown, press button 1 or wait a few secondsuntil the menu or the informative displayopens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, press the upper orlower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re-quired menu option is checked. The optionappears framed.● Press button 1 to make the required modi-fications. A mark indicates that the system orfunction is activated.

Back to menu selectionSelect Back on the corresponding menu toexit.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

117

Operation

Using the multifunction steeringwheel

Fig. 127 Right side of multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and informative in-dications on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 110 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 127.

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 127; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 127.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 127 or

wait a few seconds until the menu or the in-formative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-wheel of the multifunction steering wheel››› Fig. 127 until the desired option of themenu is highlighted. The option appearsframed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 127 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or ››› Fig. 127.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Control and warning lamps

Warning symbols


The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-tions. Some control and warning lamps comeon when the ignition is switched on, andswitch off when the engine starts running, orwhile driving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 102, Dashboard.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, ormay cause accidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● Park the vehicle away from traffic andensure that there are no highly flammablematerials under the vehicle that couldcome into contact with the exhaust system(e.g. dry grass, fuel).

118


● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.● In any vehicle, the engine compartment isa hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 315.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

Multifunction steeringwheel*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to controlthe audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract the driv-er.

There are two versions of the multifunctionmodule:

● Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi-gation version: for controlling the audiofunctions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth systemfrom the steering wheel.● Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi-gation version: for controlling the audiofunctions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth systemfrom the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.119

Operation

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 128 Controls on the steering wheel.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

ATurn

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in audio mode(radio).

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in audio mode(media).


Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in telephonemode.

Turn announcement volumeup/down. You do not need tobe in navigation mode butthere has to be an announce-ment active when you adjustthe volume.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation

announcement.

B a)Activate/deactivate voice control.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’sfunction is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationb).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next song. Hold down: Fast rewind/for-wardc).

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-dio/Media functionality (ex-cept AUX) – Active call: no function

No function for the othermodes (navigation, assis-tants, vehicle status, traveldata).

E / F a) Change instrument panel menu.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

120



G Coloured instrument panel: change to the previous menu.Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

HTurn

Coloured instrument panel:List of stations available (on-ly if the instrument panel is inaudio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: Listof last calls. – Active call: access the calloptions list (call on hold,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Active route: access theview to halt guidance to des-tination. – No active route: list of previ-ous destinations.

HPress Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)


ATurn

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in audiomode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in audiomode (media).

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in audiomode (media).

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in tele-phone mode.

Turn announcement volumeup/down. You do not need to be innavigation mode but there has tobe an announcement activewhen you adjust the volume.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

B a) Enable/disable voice controlb).This function can be used from any mode, except with an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next song.Hold down: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functions (except AUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data). »

121

Operation


E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

G Short pressb): change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semi-circular clocksLong pressb): access settings of “Individual Profiles”.

HTurn

List of sources available(audio/media).

List of sources available(audio/media). No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

If there is a map on the DigitalScorecard: Zoom in-out (with orwithout an active route).If there is no map on the DigitalScorecard: the map is transferredfrom the Infotainment System dis-play to the Digital Scorecard(with and without active route).

HPress No function No function No function No function Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

122


Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system without voice control

Fig. 129 Controls on the steering wheel.


ATurn

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in audio mode(radio).



Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in telephonemode.

Turn announcement volumeup/down. You do not need tobe in navigation mode butthere has to be an announce-ment active when you adjustthe volume.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation

announcement.

B a)

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long press).– Ongoing call: hang up (short press).– No incoming/ongoing call: open phone menu (short press), repeat last ongoing call (long press).These functions can be carried out on any mode (audio, media, navigations, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationb).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next song. Hold down: Fast rewind/for-wardc).

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-dio/Media functionality (ex-cept AUX) – Active call: no function

No function for the othermodes (navigation, assis-tants, vehicle status, traveldata).

E / F a) Change instrument panel menu.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). »

123

Operation


G Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available).This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

HTurn

Coloured instrument panel:List of stations available (on-ly if the instrument panel is inaudio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: Listof last calls. – Active call: access the calloptions list (call on hold,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Active route: access theview to halt guidance to des-tination. – No active route: list of previ-ous destinations.

HPress Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

124

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Keys

Set of keys

Fig. 130 Set of keys.

The set of keys may consists of the following,depending on the version of your vehicle:

● a remote control key ››› Fig. 130 A

● a key without remote control B ,● a plastic key tab* C .

or

● two keys with remote control A

● a plastic key tab* C .

Duplicate keysIf you need a replacement key, go to a Tech-nical Service with your vehicle identificationnumber.

WARNING● An incorrect use of the keys can causeserious injuries.● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key could startthe engine or activate any electric equip-ment (e.g. electric windows), causing riskof accident. The doors can be locked usingthe remote control key. This could becomean obstacle for assistance in an emergen-cy situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTIONThere are electronic components in the re-mote control key. Avoid wetting and hittingthe keys.

Remote control*

Fig. 131 Assignment of buttons on the remotecontrol key.

Fig. 132 Vehicle key with alarm button.

The radio frequency remote control key isused to lock and unlock the vehicle from adistance.

By using button 4 ››› Fig. 131 on the control,the key shaft is released.

Unlocking the vehicle ››› Fig. 131 1 . »125

Operation

Locking the vehicle ››› Fig. 131 2 .

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button ››› Fig. 131 3 until all the turn signals on thevehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but-ton 3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes toopen the door. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again.

Moreover, the battery indicator on the key››› Fig. 131 (arrow), will flash.

The remote control transmitter and the bat-teries are integrated in the key. The receiver isinside the vehicle. The maximum range de-pends on different factors. The range is re-duced as the batteries start to lose power.

Alarm button*Only press alarm button in the event of anemergency ››› Fig. 132 5 ! When the alarmbutton is pressed, the vehicle horn is heardand the turn signals are switched on for ashort time. When the alarm button is pressedagain, the alarm is switched off.

WARNINGRead and observe the relevant warnings››› in Set of keys on page 125.

Note● The remote control key works only whenyou are in its scope.

● If the vehicle cannot be unlocked orlocked by using the radio frequency remotecontrol, the remote control key will have tobe re-synchronised. For this, go to yourtechnical services.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 133 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-partment.

Fig. 134 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 125.● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 133 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 134.● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 134, pressing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow ››› .● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 133, pressingit onto the vehicle key casing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

126

Opening and closing

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronising the remote controlkey

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the doorwith the remote control, it should be re-synchronised.

While the vehicle is open:– Press button 2 ››› Fig. 131 on the remote

control.

– Then close the vehicle using the key shaftwithin one minute.

While the vehicle is closed:– Press button 1 ››› Fig. 131 on the remote

control.

– Then close the vehicle using the key shaftwithin one minute.

If the is pressed repeatedly outside therange of action of the remote control, the ve-hicle may not open or close when using theremote control. The remote control key willhave to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are available atyour Technical Service, where they must bematched to the locking system.

Up to five remote control keys can be used.

Central locking system

Description


The central locking system enables you tolock and unlock all doors and the rear lid byjust pushing the button.

Central locking can be activated by usingany of the following options:

● the key, by inserting it into the driver doorcylinder and rotating it in the opening direc-tion. Depending on the vehicle version, eitherall doors will be unlocked or only the driverdoor will be unlocked. All doors will be lockedon locking the vehicle using the key.● the interior central lock button››› page 129.● the radio frequency remote control, us-ing the buttons on the key ››› page 125.

Various functions are available to improve thevehicle safety:

Locking system “Safe*”Selective* unlocking systemSelf-locking system to prevent involunta-ry unlockingAutomatic speed dependent locking andunlocking system*Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*Press the button ››› Fig. 131 on the re-mote control to unlock all the doors andthe rear lid.

Locking the vehicle*Press the button ››› Fig. 131 on the re-mote control to lock all doors and therear lid or turn the key in the door to lockall doors and the rear lid.

WARNING● Locking from the outside carelessly orwithout good visibility may lead to bruising,particularly in the case of children.● When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-dren unaccompanied inside, as from theoutside it will be difficult to provide assis-tance if required.● Having the doors locked prevents intrud-ers from getting in, for example when stop-ped at a traffic light. »

–––

–

–

–

–

127

Operation

NoteFor anti-theft security, only the driver dooris fitted with a lock cylinder.

“Safe” security system*1)

This is an anti-theft device which consists of adouble lock for the door locks and a deacti-vation function for the boot in order to preventforced entry.

ActivationThe “safe” system is activated when the vehi-cle is locked using the key or the remote con-trol.

To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in-serted in the door lock cylinder in the lockingdirection.

To activate the system using the remote con-trol, press the lock button once on the re-mote.

Once this system is activated, opening doorsfrom the outside and the inside is not possi-ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen-tral lock button does not work.

When the ignition is switched off, the instru-ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”system is on.

DeactivationRotate the key inserted in the lock cylindertwice towards the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con-trol, press the lock button on the remotetwice in less than 5 seconds.

On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarmvolumetric sensor is also deactivated.

With the “Safe” switched off, doors can beopened from the interior but not from the ex-terior.

See “Selective unlocking system*”

“Safe” statusOn the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-ble from outside the vehicle through the win-dow which shows the “Safe” system status.

We will know that “Safe” system is activatedby the flashing warning lamp. The indicatorwill flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fittedwith an alarm, until they unlock.

Remember:

Safe enabled with or without alarm: con-tinuous flashing of warning lamp.

Safe disabled without alarm: the warninglamp stays off.

Safe disabled with alarm: the warning lampstays off.

WARNINGNo one should remain inside the vehicle ifthe “Safe” system is activated becauseopening the doors will not be possible inthe event of an emergency neither from theinside nor the outside and help from theoutside is made difficult. Danger of death.Passengers could become trapped insidein case of emergency.

Selective unlocking system*

This system allows to unlock either just thedriver door or all the vehicle.

Driver door unlock buttonUnlock once. Use either the key or the remotecontrol.

Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder,rotate once in the unlock direction. The driverdoor will remain without “Safe” and unlocked.

1) Available depending on market and version.128

Opening and closing

In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see the Anti-theft Alarm section ››› page 133.

Using the remote control, press the unlockbutton on the remote once. The “Safe” sys-tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only thedriver door is unlocked and both the alarmand the warning lamp are also turned off.

Unlocking all doors and the luggage com-partmentThe unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that all doors andthe luggage compartment can be opened.

Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivatethe “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock alldoors and to use the luggage compartment.The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi-cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Unlocking the luggage compartmentSee ››› page 16.

Self-locking system to prevent in-voluntary unlocking

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-intentional unlocking of the vehicle.

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of thedoors (including the boot) are opened within30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Automatic speed-dependent lock-ing and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevents accessto the vehicle from the outside when it is run-ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

LockingThe doors will lock automatically if the speedof 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lidwill lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h(4 mph) is exceeded.

If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doorsopen, when starting again and exceeding thementioned speed, all doors will lock again.

UnlockingOn withdrawing the ignition key, the vehiclewill returns to its status prior to self-locking.

Each door can be unlocked and opened in-dependently from the inside (for example,when a passenger gets out). To do it, simplyoperate the lever inside the door.

WARNINGThe door handles must not be operatedwhen the vehicle is running: the door wouldopen.

NoteIf the airbags are triggered during an acci-dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for theluggage compartment. It is possible to lockthe vehicle from inside with the centrallocking, after turning the ignition off andback on again.

Central lock button*

Fig. 135 Central lock button.


The central lock button allows you to lockand unlock the vehicle from the inside.

The central lock button also works with theignition switched off, except when the “safe”system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your ve-hicle with the central lock button: »

129

Operation

● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac-cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.when stopped at a traffic light).● The driver door cannot be locked while it isopen. This avoids the user from forgetting hiskey inside the vehicle.● All doors can be unlocked separately frominside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door re-lease lever once.

WARNING● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa-bled people may be trapped inside it.● Repeated operation of central lockingwill prevent the central lock button fromworking for a few seconds. Then, it can onlybe unlocked in case it has been previouslylocked. After few seconds, the central lock-ing becomes operative again.● The central lock button is not operativewhen the vehicle is locked from the outside(with the remote control or the key).

Related videos Keyless Access

Fig. 136 Convenience

Fig. 137 Technology

Unlocking and locking the vehiclewith Keyless Access*

Fig. 138 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: In the proximity of the car.

Fig. 139 Locking and ignition system withoutKeyless Access: sensor surface A for unlock-ing inside the door handle and sensor surfaceB for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. To do this, allthat is required is to have a valid vehicle key inthe detection area where you are attemptingto access the vehicle ››› Fig. 138 and to touchone of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles ››› Fig. 139 ››› .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe driver door only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,for instance whether it is in your jacket pocketor in a briefcase.

130

Opening and closing

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlockonly the driver’s door, the side being un-locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessaryadjustments can be performed in vehicleswith a driver information system››› page 34.

General informationIf a valid key is located in the proximity of thecar ››› Fig. 138, the Keyless Access lockingand starting system gives the key entry assoon as one of the sensor surfaces on thedriver door handle is touched. The followingfeatures are then available without having touse the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handle of the front driver’s door or thesofttouch/handle on the rear lid.● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor on the driver door handle.● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 220.

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; locking bya single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside, thevehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Key-less-Entry)● Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, thesensor surface ››› Fig. 139 A (arrow) on thehandle is touched and the vehicle unlocks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without safety system “Safe”:closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-it)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.

● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B(arrow) on the driver door handle. The doorthat is used must be closed.

In vehicles with safety system “Safe”:closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-it)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B(arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehiclelocks with the “Safe” security system››› page 128. The door that is used must beclosed.● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow)of the driver door handle to lock the vehiclewithout activating the “Safe” security system››› page 128.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 138.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Ifthe complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lidwill not lock automatically after closing it. »

131

Operation

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a second ve-hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blockedfor engine ignition ››› page 217. In order toenable engine ignition, press the button onthe key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in an unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branchesof a bush rubbing against it), all proximitysensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-cess unlocking for a locking and unlockingcycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-wise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on the re-mote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 139 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is alsopossible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deacti-vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pullon the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows using theconvenience function, keep a finger on thelocking sensor surface B (arrow) of the door

handle for a few seconds until the windowshave closed.

The doors opened by touching the sensorsurface of the door handle depend on thesettings that have been activated in the EasyConnect system with the / button andthe SETTINGS > Opening and closingfunction buttons.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehiclekey in the proximity. If at least one of theelectric windows is open and the sensorsurface B (arrow) on the handle is activa-ted continuously, all windows will close.

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehi-cle can be unlocked or locked manually.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT

132

Opening and closing

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on thedriver door handle.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g.from a mobile device accessory) or if thekey is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic gearbox, it may only be locked in thegear stick is in position P.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote controldoes not detect movement for a certainlength of time, the system will concludethat the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. ona night table) so it will be disabled.

Childproof lock

Fig. 140 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 140 andclockwise for the right-hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, anti-clockwisefor the right-hand side doors, and clock-wise for the left-hand side doors››› Fig. 140.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.The childproof lock can be activated or de-activated by inserting the key in the groovewhen the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm*

Description of anti-theft alarm sys-tem*

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it. The systemwill initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automaticallyswitched on when locking the vehicle. Thesystem is immediately activated and the turn »

133

Operation

signal light located on the driver door willflash along with the turn signals, indicatingthat the alarm and the locking security sys-tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,they will not be included in the protectionzones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-quently closed, they will be automatically in-cluded in the protection areas of the vehicleand the turn signals will flash accordinglywhen the doors close.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The system triggers an alarm, if the followingunauthorised actions are carried out whenthe vehicle is locked:

● Mechanical opening of the vehicle with thevehicle key without switching on the ignition inthe next 15 seconds (in certain markets, suchas the Netherlands, the alarm is activated im-mediately).● A door is opened.● Opening the bonnet.

● The rear lid is opened.● Ignition switched on with a non-validatedkey.● Movements in the driving compartment (ve-hicles with a volume sensor).● Towing of the vehicle1).● Vehicle tilt angle1).● Undue manipulation of the alarm.● Battery handling.

In this case, the acoustic signals will go offand the turn signal will flash for approximate-ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeatedup to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening all the doors in manual modeIn vehicles without an alarm, when openingthe driver door manually, all doors areopened.

How to switch the alarm offTo deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn thekey in the opening direction, open the doorand switch the ignition on, or press the unlockbutton on the remote control.

In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarmsystem, you have 15 seconds to insert the keyin the ignition lock and activate the ignition if

the vehicle is opened using the driver doorkey.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.and the ignition will be blocked.

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery fromdraining if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.● The alarm will trigger again if attemptsare made to open another protection zone.● The alarm system can be activated ordeactivated using the radio frequency re-mote control ››› page 125.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within usingthe central locking button .● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason.● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection134

Opening and closing

Vehicle interior monitoring and an-ti-tow system*

Monitoring or control function incorporated inthe anti-theft alarm* which detects unau-thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

Activation– It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation– Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the button onthe remote control. If the vehicle is openedmechanically, the time period from whenthe door is opened until the key is insertedinto the contact should not exceed 15 sec-onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

– Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-sors will be deactivated. The alarm systemremains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched

on. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

False alarmsInterior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully),● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging from therear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated when

the alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activatedonce all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

Deactivating the vehicle interiormonitoring and anti-tow system*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will betriggered if movements are detected in the in-terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli-nation is changed (e.g. during transport). Youcan prevent the alarm from being triggeredaccidentally by switching off the vehicle inte-rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection.

– To switch off the interior monitoring andtow-away protection, switch off the ignition »

135

Operation

and, using the Infotainment system, select:Infotainment button / and then theSETTINGS > Opening and closing >Central locking > Vehicle interiormonitoring button.

– When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away pro-tection are switched off until the next timethe door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*››› page 128 is switched off, the vehicle interi-or monitoring and the tow-away protectionare automatically switched off.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in De-scription on page 127.

Rear lid

Opening and closing


WARNING● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk ofaccident or injury.

● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjec-ted to extremely high and low tempera-tures, depending on the time of year, thuscausing serious injuries/illness. It couldeven have fatal consequences. Close andlock both the rear lid and all the otherdoors when you are not using the vehicle.● Closing the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause seriousinjury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may enter into theinterior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!● If you only open the rear lid, do not leavethe key inside. The vehicle cannot beopened if the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Opening and closing the electricwindows

Fig. 141 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe front and rear windows.


The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front

136

Opening and closing

passenger door has been opened and thekey has not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch The safety switch ››› Fig. 141 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

● Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.● Safety switch pressed: buttons on reardoors are deactivated. The safety controlsymbol lights up in yellow if the buttons onthe rear doors are switched off.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Set ofkeys on page 125.● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergencysituation.

● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-able the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 137. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic closingwill stop working for 10 seconds.

● If the window is still obstructed, the windowwill stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window willopen fully when you operate one of the but-tons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING● Always take the ignition key with youwhen leaving the vehicle, even if you onlyintend to be gone for a short time. Pleaseensure that children are never left alone in-side the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● Closing the windows without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause seriousinjury to you and third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of a window.● Never allow people to remain in the vehi-cle when you close the vehicle from theoutside. The windows cannot be openedeven in an emergency.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

137

Operation

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-tion to easily open/close all the windowsfrom the outside.

Convenience open function– Press and hold the button on the remote

control key until all the windows havereached the desired position, or

– First unlock the vehicle using the buttonon the remote control key and then keepthe key in the driver door lock until all thewindows have reached the required posi-tion.

Convenience close function– Press and hold the button on the remote

control key until all the windows are closed››› , or

– Lock the driver's door with the key and holdthe key in the lock position until all the win-dows are closed

Programming convenience opening in theEasy Connect*– Select: / SETTINGS> Opening andclosing > Electric windows > Con-venience opening, to choose between allthe windows (All), only the driver’s window(Driver) or none (Deactivated).

WARNING● Never close the windows without duecare or proper control. There is a risk of suf-fering injury.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

One-touch opening and closing*

One-touch opening and closing means youdo not have to hold down the button.

Buttons ››› Fig. 141 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have twopositions for opening windows and two forclosing them. This makes it easier to openand close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing– Pull up the window button briefly up to the

second position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening– Push down the window button briefly up to

the second position. The window opensfully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing– The automatic open and close function will

not work if the battery has been temporarilydisconnected. The function can be restoredas follows:

– Close the window as far as it will go by lift-ing and holding the electric window switch.

– Release the switch and then lift it again for 1second. This will re-enable the automaticfunction.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage,the window will open (or close) until you re-lease the button. If you push or lift the buttonbriefly to the second stage, the window willopen (one-touch opening) or close (one-touch closing) automatically. If you operatethe button while the window is opening orclosing, it stops at this position.

138



Lights

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 140.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turnsignal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 143.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 140.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Warn-ing symbols on page 118.

Switching lights on and off


The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.● If the lights are left on after the key hasbeen taken out of the ignition lock, an audi-ble warning sounds while the driver doorremains open. This is a reminder to switchthe lights off.● The use of the lighting described here issubject to the relevant statutory require-ments.

Automatic dipped beam control*

The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on and off automatical-ly in the following situations ››› in Daytimerunning lights on page 140:

Automatic switch-ing on

Automatic switch-ing off

The photo sensor de-tects darkness, for exam-ple, when driving througha tunnel.

When adequate lightingis detected.

The rain sensor detectsrain and activates thewindscreen wipers.

When the windscreenwipers have been inac-tive for a few minutes.

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enoughor at all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control() only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are no changes in brightness,and not, for example when it is foggy.

139

Operation

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu-al lights, integrated in the front headlights. Byconnecting the daytime running lights, theselights are switched on1) ››› .

The daytime running lights switch on everytime the ignition is switched on, if the switch isin positions or , according to the level ofexterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a lightsensor automatically switches dipped beamon and off (including the control and instru-ment lighting) or the daytime running lightsdepending on the level of exterior lighting.

WARNING● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions. Daytime lights do not provideenough light to illuminate the road properlyor be seen by other road users.● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-cle which does not have the rear lights onmay not be visible to other drivers in thedarkness, in the case of heavy rain or inconditions of poor visibility.

Fog lights

Fig. 142 Instrument console: light panel.

Switching on the front fog lights*● Pull the light switch to the first point››› Fig. 142 1 , from positions , or .The symbol in the light switch lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicleswith front fog lights)● Completely pull the light switch 2 fromposition , or . The lamp on the in-strument panel lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicleswith no front fog lights)● Completely pull the light switch 2 fromposition , or . This type of switch on-

ly has one position. The lamp on the instru-ment panel lights up.

Turn signal and main beam lever


Parking lights● Switch the ignition off and remove the keyfrom the lock.● Move the turn signal lever up or down toturn the right or left-hand parking lights on,respectively.

Convenience turn signalsFor the one-touch signalling, when the igni-tion is switched on, move the lever as far aspossible upwards or downwards and releasethe lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system via the / button and the function button SET-TINGS > Lights > One-touch signal-ling ››› page 34.

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, therear side light is switched on as well.

140


In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

WARNINGThe main beam can dazzle other drivers.Risk of accident! Never use the main beamheadlights or the headlight flasher if theycould dazzle other drivers.

Note● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signals only work when the igni-tion is switched on. The correspondingwarning lamp flashes in the instrumentpanel. The control lamp flashes whenthe turn signals are operated, provided atrailer is correctly attached and connectedto the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-tive, the control lamp flashes at doublespeed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs aredefective, the control lamp does notlight up. Change the bulb.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on. The warning lamp thencomes on in the instrument panel.● The headlight flasher comes on for aslong as you pull the lever – even if no other

lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instrument panel.● When the parking lights are switched on,the headlight and the tail light on the cor-responding side of the vehicle light up. Theparking lights will only work with the igni-tion off. If said light is on, an audible warn-ing will be emitted while the driver door isopen.● If the turn signal lever is left on after thekey has been taken out of the ignition lock,an acoustic signal sounds when the driverdoor is opened. This is intended as a re-minder to switch off the turn signal, unlessyou wish to leave the parking light on.

Coming Home/Leaving Home Func-tion*

Fig. 143 Related video

The Leaving Home function is controlled witha photosensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func-tion is connected, the front side and dipped

lights, the tail lights and the number platelight will light up to provide assistance.

Coming Home functionThe Coming Home function is activated byswitching off the ignition. When the driverdoor is opened, the Coming Home lightingcomes on.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in thefollowing cases:

● If, 30 seconds after being connected, anydoors or the rear lid remain open.● If the light switch is turned to position .● If the ignition is switched on.

Automatic Leaving Home functionThe Leaving Home function is activated whenthe vehicle is unlocked if:

● the light control is in position and● the photosensor detects “darkness”.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in thefollowing cases:

● If the time period for the delay in switchingoff the headlights has ended● If the vehicle is locked again.● If the light switch is turned to position .● If the ignition is switched on. »

141

Operation

Note● To activate the Coming/Leaving homefunction, the rotary light switch must be inposition and the light sensor must de-tect darkness.

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion*

3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full-LED headlights and bulb fog lights.

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on andit is enabled when driving at speeds belowapproximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Forward gear● If the steering wheel is turned to the right orthe right-hand turn signal switched on, theright-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.● If the steering wheel is turned to the left orthe left-hand turn signal switched on, the left-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.● After the turn, the cornering light function isgradually switched off.

Reverse gear● When engaging the reverse gear, both foglights turn on.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected viathe corresponding Easy Connect systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dippedbeam returns to its normal position.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the head-light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-

justment of the headlights to avoid dazzlingother drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution. Thisis known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-LED headlights allows the specific “touristlight” values to be met without the need forstickers or changes in the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

142


Headlight range control

Fig. 144 Instrument panel: headlight rangecontrol.

The lights range control adapts according tothe value of the headlight beam and the vehi-cle load status. This offers the driver optimumvisibility and the headlights do not dazzle on-coming drivers ››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 144:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Driver only, luggage compartment fullWith trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to thoseshown in the table, it is possible to select intermediarypositions.

Dynamic headlight range controlThe control is not mounted in vehicles withdynamic headlight range control. The head-light range is automatically adjusted accord-ing to the vehicle load status when they areswitched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may meanthat the headlights dazzle and distract oth-er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-cident.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

Hazard warning lights


The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-ard warning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never park »

143

Operation

in an area where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with highly inflam-mable materials, for example dry grass orspilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel,screens and controls


Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument panel and controls can be adjus-ted in the Easy Connect system, using the / button and the SETTINGS function

button ››› page 34.

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the analogue instrument panel lightingremains activated in daytime light conditions.The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when drivingthrough a tunnel without the function ac-tive, the instrument panel lighting may evenswitch off. The objective of this function is toprovide the driver with a visual indication thathe or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), thefollowing message will appear Turn on thelights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights


Luggage compartment lightingThe light is activated when the rear lid isopen, even when the ignition and lights areturned off. For this reason, ensure that therear lid is always closed.

Ambient light*The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console and the footwell area and,depending on the version, the front door pan-els as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness whenthe doors are opened and the lights will bedimmed during driving, when the light selec-tor is in , or .

The brightness of the ambient light* can beadjusted through the Easy Connect menu, ascan colour, in versions with lighting on thefront door panel (the / button and thefunction button SETTINGS > backgroundlighting ››› page 34).

NoteIf not all the vehicle doors are closed, theinterior lights will be switched off after ap-prox. 10 minutes, providing the ignition keyhas been removed and the courtesy lightposition selected. This prevents the batteryfrom discharging.

144


Visibility

Heated rear window

Fig. 146 With the air conditioning controls:heated rear window.

The heated rear window only works when theengine is running. When it is switched on, alamp lights up on the switch.

After approximately 8 minutes, the heatingdevice of the rear window switches off auto-matically.

For the sake of the environmentThe heated rear window should be switch-ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. Bysaving electrical power you can also savefuel.

NoteTo avoid possible damage to the battery,an automatic temporary disconnection ofthis function is possible, coming back on

when normal operating conditions are re-established.

Sun visors

Fig. 147 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors:● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 147 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-tudinally backwards.

Vanity mirrorThere is a vanity mirror, with a cover 2 , onthe rear of the sun blind.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Windscreen wiper and window wip-er


WARNING● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visi-bility and safety levels while driving.● In cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the heatingand ventilation system. The windscreenwasher fluid could otherwise freeze on thewindscreen and obscure your view of theroad.● Always note the corresponding warnings››› page 61. »

145

Operation

WARNINGThe rain sensor* may not detect enoughrain to switch on the wipers.● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

CAUTIONIn icy conditions, always check that thewindscreen wipers and the window wiperare not frozen. If you switch on the wind-screen wipers when the wiper blades arefrozen to the windscreen, you could dam-age both the wiper blades and the wipermotor.

Note● The wipers and washers will work onlywhen the ignition is switched on.● The heat output of the heated jets* iscontrolled automatically when the ignitionis switched on, depending upon the outsidetemperature.● In certain versions of vehicles withalarms, the windscreen wiper will only workin interval/rain sensor mode when the igni-tion is on and the bonnet closed.● When the interval wipe function is on, theintervals are directly proportional to thespeed. This way, the higher the vehiclespeed the shorter the intervals.

● If you stop the vehicle with the wind-screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-matically change to a lower positionspeed. The set speed will be resumed whenthe vehicle pulls away.● The windscreen will be wiped again afterapproximately five seconds once the “au-tomatic wash/wipe system” has been acti-vated, provided the vehicle is moving (dripfunction). If you activate the wipers lessthan 3 seconds after the drip function, anew wash sequence will begin without per-forming the last wipe. For the “drip” func-tion to work again, you have to turn the ig-nition off and then on again.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.● Depending on the version of the model,when you engage reverse gear and withthe headlight wiper activated, this canstart a wipe.

Rear view mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot seeclearly through the rear window.

Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzlefunction*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

Note● The automatic anti-dazzle function willonly work properly if the sun blind* for therear window is retracted and there are noother objects preventing light from reach-ing the interior rear vision mirror.● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or evenfrom working at all.

Folding in the exterior mirrors man-ually

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to-wards the vehicle.

146


NoteBefore washing the vehicle with an auto-matic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrorsto avoid damage.

Electric exterior mirrors*

Fig. 148 Exterior mirror controls.


The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using therotary knob in the driver door.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 148 to position L (left ex-

terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteriormirror so that you have a good view to therear of the vehicle.

3. Turn the knob to position R (right exteriormirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the exte-rior mirror so that you have a good view tothe rear of the vehicle ››› .

Heated exterior mirrors*– Press the demisting button ››› Fig. 146

– The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre-vent draining the battery unnecessarily.

– If necessary, press the button again to re-peat the function.

– The exterior mirror heating is not activatedin temperatures above approximately+20°C (+68°F).

Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically*– Turn the control ››› Fig. 148 to position to

fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you aredriving through an automatic car wash. Thiswill help prevent damage.

Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex-tended position*– Turn the knob to position L or R to return the

exterior mirrors to their original position››› .

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*The Easy Connect system, the / but-ton and the function buttons SETTINGS >Mirrors and windscreen wipers can beused to have the exterior mirrors fold in whenthe vehicle is parked and locked››› page 34.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-tomatically. When the vehicle is opened withthe remote control, the exterior mirrors aredeployed automatically.

WARNING● Convex or aspheric mirrors increase thefield of vision however the objects appearsmaller and further away in the mirrors. Ifyou use these mirrors to estimate the dis-tance to vehicles behind you when chang-ing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk ofaccident.● If possible, use the rear vision mirror toestimate distances to vehicles behind you.● Make sure that you do not get your fingertrapped between the mirror and the mirrorbase when folding back the mirrors. Risk ofinjury! »

147

Operation

For the sake of the environmentThe exterior mirror heating should beswitched off when it is no longer needed.Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note● If the electrical adjustment ever fails tooperate, the mirrors can be adjusted byhand by lightly pressing the edge of themirror glass.● In vehicles with retractable external rear-view mirrors, the following must be consid-ered: if, due to an external force (e.g. beingknocked while manoeuvring), the adjust-ment of the mirror housing is altered, themirror will have to be fully folded electri-cally. Do not readjust the rear vision mirrorhousing by hand, as this will interfere withthe mirror adjuster function.● The fold-in function on the exterior mir-rors will not activate at speeds over40 km/h (25 mph).

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seat and headrestraints

Adjusting the front seats


WARNINGThe safe driving chapter contains impor-tant information, tips, suggestions andwarnings that you should read and observefor your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers ››› page 63.

WARNING● Never adjust the driver or front passengerseat while the vehicle is in motion. Whileadjusting your seat, you will assume an in-correct sitting position. Risk of accidents.Adjust the driver or front passenger seatonly when the vehicle is stationary.● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverand front passenger in case of a suddenbraking or an accident, never drive with thebackrest tilted towards the rear. The maxi-mum protection of the seat belt can beachieved only when the backrests are in anupright position and the driver and frontpassenger have properly adjusted their

seat belts. The further the backrests are til-ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injurydue to improper positioning of the belt web!● Exercise caution when securing the seatheight into forwards/backwards position.Injuries can be caused if the seat height isadjusted without due care and attention.● To move the seat forwards and back-wards, pull upwards and not sideways onthe lever, as the force exerted on it in thatdirection could damage it.

Adjusting the front head restraints


Adjust the head restraint ››› page 19 sothat as far as possible the top of the head re-straint is level with the top of your head. Whenthis is not possible, try to get as close as pos-sible to this position.

WARNING● Never drive if the head restraints havebeen removed. Risk of injury.● After refitting the head restraint, youmust always adjust it properly for height toachieve optimal protection.● Please observe the safety warnings ››› in Correct adjustment of front head re-straints on page 67.

148


Note● When fitting the head restraints again, in-sert the tubes as far as possible into theguides without pressing the button.

Adjustment of the rear head re-straints

Fig. 149 Rear centre head restraint: releasepoint.

When transporting people in the back seat,place the head restraints of the occupiedseats at a minimum of the next socket up››› .

Adjusting the head restraints– To set the head restraint higher, grasp the

sides with both hands and move it upwards,until you see it engage.

– To set the head restraint lower down, pressthe 1 ››› Fig. 149 button and move itdownwards.

Removing the head restraintTo remove the head restraint, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 151.

– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-rives to the top.

– Press button 1 , while simultaneouslypressing on the security hole 2 with a flatscrewdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, andremove the head restraint.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

Fitting the head restraintTo mount the external head restraints, thecorresponding backrest must be partially fol-ded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 151.

– Insert the head restraint bars into theguides until they perceptibly engage. Itshould not be possible to remove the headrestraint from the backrest.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

WARNING● Please observe the general notes››› page 68.● Remove the rear head restraints onlywhen it is necessary for the placement of achild seat ››› page 80. After removing achild seat, remount the head restraint im-mediately. Travelling with the head re-straints removed or improperly adjusted in-creases the risk of severe injuries.

Seat functions

Introduction

WARNINGInappropriate use of the seat functions cancause severe injuries.● Assume the proper sitting position beforeyour trip and remain in it throughout. Thisalso applies to the other occupants.● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth-er parts of the body away from the operat-ing radius and the adjustment of seats.

149

Operation

Heated seats*

Fig. 150 On the centre console: front seatsheating switch : version with Climatronic. :version with manual air conditioning.

The seat cushions can be heated electricallywhen the ignition is switched on. The backrestis also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged inany of the following conditions:

● The seat is unoccupied.● The seat has a covering.● There is a child seat installed in the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-er than 25°C (77°F).

ActivatePress the button or . Seat heating isswitched on fully.

Adjusting the heating outputPress the button or repeatedly until thedesired temperature is reached.

DeactivatingPress the button or until all the warninglamps switch off.

WARNINGChildren and people who cannot perceivepain or temperature because of medica-tions, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g.diabetes) or have a limited perception ofthese, may suffer burns to the back, but-tocks or legs when using seat heating, anoccurrence that may entail a very lengthyrecovery period or from which it may not bepossible to recover fully. Seek medical ad-vice if you have doubts regarding yourhealth.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's temper-ature control is detected, have it checkedby a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-sary fuel waste.

150


Fold down the rear seats

Fig. 151 On the rear seat backrest: releasebutton 1 ; red mark 2 .

Folding the backrest forwards● Completely lower the rear headrests››› page 148.● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 151 1 for-wards and at the same time fold the backrestdown. The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button 2 is visi-ble.

Converting the table to a seat● Raise and lock in the back rest. The redmarking on the tab 2 should no longer bevisible when the backrest is properly secured.

On split rear seats*, the backrest can be low-ered in two sections.

WARNING● Please be careful when folding back thebackrest! Injuries can be caused if the seatheight is adjusted without due care and at-tention.● Do no trap or damage seat belts whenraising the backrest.● After raising the backrest, check it hasengaged properly in position. Do this bypulling on the central seat belt or directlyon the backrest and check that the positionlever is in the neutral position.● The three point automatic seat belt onlyworks correctly when the backrest of thecentral seat is correctly engaged.

Removable seat covers

Fig. 152 Remove the covers. Left front seat; Rear seats »

151

Operation

Fig. 153 Label on the covers: washing instruc-tion symbols

Seasonal seats are seats with removable, re-versible, exchangeable and washable covers.

Removing the coverIt is suggested to move the rear seats to theirrearmost position so it is easier to remove andput the covers.

● Move the seat backwards until the handleof the zip is completely accessible››› Fig. 152 1 1).● Move the handle of the zip in the directionindicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 152. The re-movable cover is released.● Pull the cover off.● Move the seat back to driving position1).

Putting the cover● Move the seat backwards until the anchorpoint of the zip is completely accessible1).● Place the removable cover on the anchorof the zip (the pillows have 2 anchor points).● Move the handle of the zip against the di-rection indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 152.● Insert the excess fabric in the joint betweenpillow and backrest, ensuring that the remov-able cover is firm1).● Move the seat back to driving position1).

CAUTION● Washing instructions for removable cov-ers ››› Fig. 153:– Wash the covers in a washing machine

using a delicate program, with water at30°C and separately.

– Do not use bleach, centrifuge or dry-clean.

– Hang out the covers horizontally.– Iron the covers with steam, placing a

piece of fabric between cover and iron.– Avoid contact between the iron and the

Alcantara leather parts.

Note● If using the seats without removable cov-ers, the handle of the zip must be at thestart of the zip.● To clean the upholstery of the seats, seethe fabric cleaning section ››› page 339.

1) Only in font seats.152

Transport and practical equipment

Transport and practicalequipment

Practical equipment

Glove compartment

Fig. 154 Passenger side: glove compartment.

The compartment can be opened by pullingthe lever ››› Fig. 154.

This compartment can hold documents in A4format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CDplayer is located in the glove compartment.Separate operating instructions are enclosedfor this equipment in the corresponding In-struction Manual.

WARNINGAlways keep the storage compartmentcover closed while the vehicle is in motionin order to reduce the risk of injury causedby a sudden braking or by an accident.

Storage compartment under thefront seats*

Fig. 155 Storage compartment under the rightfront passenger seat.

To open– The compartment is opened by pulling on

the lever and guiding it with your hand.

To close– Press the cover inwards until the closed

drawer “clicks” into position.

NoteThe storage drawer will hold a maximumweight of 1.5 kg.

Storage pocket in the seat*

Fig. 156 Storage pocket.

There is a storage pocket on the rear of thefront seats.

Storage compartment in front doorpanel*

In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-tle, etc. can be stored.

153

Operation

Front drink holder*

Fig. 157 Front drink holders in the centre con-sole.

In the central console, next to the hand brake,there are two drinks holders ››› Fig. 157.

WARNING● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.During sudden or normal driving manoeu-vres, when braking suddenly or in case ofan accident, the hot drink could spill. Riskof scalding.● Never use rigid materials (for example,glass or ceramic), since they could causeinjury in the case of an accident.● When travelling, the drinks holder shouldalways be closed to prevent risk in theevent of sudden breaking or accident.

Front ashtray*

Fig. 158 Ashtray in the centre console.

Opening and closing the ashtray● To open the ashtray, lift the cover››› Fig. 158.● To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray● Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNINGNever put paper in the ashtray. Hot ashcould ignite the paper in the ashtray andcause a fire.

Electrical power socket

Fig. 159 Front power socket.

The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket canalso be used for other electrical componentswith a power rating of up to 120 Watt. Whenthe engine is switched off, however, the vehi-cle battery will discharge. For further informa-tion see ››› page 307.

WARNINGThe power sockets and the connected ac-cessories will only operate when the igni-tion is on or when the engine is running. Im-proper use of the sockets or electrical ac-cessories can lead to serious injuries orcause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, nev-er leave children alone inside the vehicle.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

154


Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a batterydischarge.● Before using any electrical accessories,see the instructions in ››› page 307.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 160 Lighter.

– Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 160 toactivate it ››› .

– Wait for the lighter to spring out.

– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light thecigarette on the glowing coil.

WARNING● Improper use of the cigarette lighter canlead to serious injuries or start a fire.

● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessnessor negligence when using the cigarettelighter can cause burns and serious inju-ries.● The lighter only works when the ignition isturned on or the engine is running. To avoidthe risk of fire, never leave children aloneinside the vehicle.

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Fig. 161 Position heavy items as far forward aspossible.

All luggage and other loose objects must besafely secured in the luggage compartment.Unsecured objects which shift back and forthcould affect safety or driving characteristicsof the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.

– Distribute the load evenly in the luggagecompartment.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as pos-sible in the luggage compartment››› Fig. 161.

– Place the heavy objects first.

– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fasteningrings* ››› page 157.

– Secure loose loads with a luggage net* orwith non-elastic straps secured to the fas-tening* rings.

WARNING● Loose luggage and other objects in theluggage compartment could cause seriousinjuries.● Always stow objects in the luggage com-partment and secure them on the fasteningrings*.● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,loose objects can be thrown forward, injur-ing vehicle occupants or even third parties.This increased risk of injury will be furtherincreased if a loose object is struck by aninflating airbag. If this happens, objectsmay shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fa-tal injury.● Always keep all objects in the luggagecompartment and use appropriate grips tosecure them, particularly in the case ofheavy objects. »

155

Operation

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights orallowed maximum weight. If said weightsare exceeded, the driving characteristics ofthe vehicle may change, leading to acci-dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.● Please note that the centre of gravitymay shift when transporting heavy objects;this may affect vehicle handling and leadto an accident. Therefore, it is essential toadjust your speed and driving style ac-cordingly, to avoid accidents.● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. Close and lock all the doorsand the rear lid when you leave the vehicle.Before you lock the vehicle, make sure thatthere are no adults or children in the vehi-cle.● Please observe the notes on the››› page 63.

CAUTIONHard objects on the rear shelf could chafeagainst the wires of the heating element inthe heated rear window and cause dam-age.

Note● The tyre pressure must be adjusted ac-cording to the load. When necessary,check the tyre pressures on the adhesivelabel stuck to the back of the front left doorframe ››› page 326.● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reducefogging of the windows. Used air escapesthrough ventilation slits in the side trim ofthe luggage compartment. Ensure that theventilation slots are never covered.● Straps for securing the load to the fas-tening rings* are commercially availablefrom accessory shops.

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 162 In the boot: removing and installingthe shelf.

Fig. 163 In the boot: removing and installingthe shelf.

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 162 B fromtheir hooks A .● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 163 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

Storing the rear shelfDepending on the equipment, once the lug-gage compartment shelf has been removed,it can be stored under the boot's variablefloor ››› page 158.

● Remove the side cover sliding it upwardsand place the shelf in the bottom.● Replace the side cover.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

156


Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-cess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 163 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 162 B to the rear lid.

WARNINGDo not place heavy or hard objects on therear shelf, because they will endanger thevehicle occupants in case of sudden brak-ing.

CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

Note● Ensure that, when placing items of cloth-ing on the luggage compartment cover,rear visibility is not reduced.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 164 Location of fastening rings in luggagecompartment.

There may be some fastening rings includedin the luggage compartment for fasteningluggage and other objects ››› Fig. 164 (ar-rows).

– Always use suitable and undamaged strapsto secure luggage and other objects to thefastening rings ››› in Loading the lug-gage compartment on page 155.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lyingunsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ob-ject generates a force corresponding to 20times its weight. That means that the effectiveweight of the object increases to approxi-mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity ofthe injuries which might be sustained if this“object” strikes an occupant as it flies throughthe interior of the vehicle. This increased risk

of injury will be further increased if a looseobject is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING● If pieces of baggage or other objects aresecured to the fastening rings with inappro-priate or damaged retaining cords, injuriescould result in the event of braking ma-noeuvres or accidents.● Never secure a child seat on the fasten-ing rings.

157

Operation

Luggage compartment variablefloor

Fig. 165 Variable boot floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 166 Variable boot floor: tilted position.

Variable floor in high position● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 165 1and pull it back until the front of the floor hasfully passed the supports 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● Lift the floor using handle 1 and pull itback until the supports 2 have fully passedthe front part of the floor.● Now match the front part with the lowergrooves of the supports and slide the floorforwards as far as the rear seat backrest andlower the floor at the same time with the han-dle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position us-ing handle 1 , pull it up and push it towardsthe backrest of the rear seats until the floorfolds along the hinge line and the movablepart of the floor is resting on itself.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 166(arrows).

WARNINGDuring a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-jects could be flung though the interior andcause serious or fatal injuries.● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

158


CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the top position is 150 kg.● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefullyguide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

NoteSEAT recommends the use of straps to se-cure objects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roofcarrier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.

● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNINGWhen heavy or bulky loads are transportedon the roof carrier system, car driving per-formance is affected, as the centre of grav-ity shifts and there is greater wind resist-ance.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.

● Any cross bars, roof carrier systems orloads secured to them must not interferewith the roof aerial or block the path of therear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roofcarrier system

Fig. 167 Attachment points for the roof railingsfor the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety »

159

Operation

reasons, special fixtures must be used tosafely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surfboards or boats on the roof. Suitable acces-sories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with the cross-bars and the roof carrier system in questioninto account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings. The distance between cross bars››› Fig. 167 A should be 75 cm and the dis-tance between the cross bars and the brack-ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Use only crossbars and the roof carriersystem when they are in perfect conditionand are properly secured.● Secure the crossbars and the roof carriersystem properly.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.

● Always fit the special roof carrier sys-tems correctly for wheels, skis and surf-boards, etc.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised roof loadThe maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and the loaditself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not be

able to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum authorised roofload can result in accidents and considera-ble vehicle damage.● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system,even if the maximum authorised roof loadhas not been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward aspossible and distribute the vehicle loaduniformly.

160

Air conditioning

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.● Secure the load properly.

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation andcooling

General notes


Pollution filterThe pollution filter (a combined particulatefilter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar-rier against impurities in the outside air, in-cluding dust and pollen.

For the climate control system to work withmaximum efficiency, the pollution filter mustbe replaced at the specified intervals in theMaintenance Programme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due touse in areas reaching very high pollution lev-els, the pollen filter must be changed morefrequently than stated in the Service Sched-ule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are freeof ice and snow, and that they are not fog-

ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-erything outside.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature. Only drivewhen you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the heatingsystem, fresh air system, air conditionerand the heated rear window to maintaingood visibility to the outside.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● If you suspect that the air conditioner isdamaged, switch it off with the A/C button »

161

Operation

to prevent further damage and have itchecked by a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. There-fore, we recommend you to take the vehicleto a specialised workshop.

Note● If the humidity and temperature outsidethe vehicle are high, condensation can dripoff the evaporator in the cooling systemand form a pool underneath the vehicle.This is normal and does not indicate a leak.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots inthe luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-

structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject.● The air conditioner operates most effec-tively with the windows closed. However, ifthe temperature inside the vehicle is exces-sive because of the sun, the air inside canbe cooled faster by opening the windowsfor a short time.● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.● At low outside temperatures, the com-pressor switches off automatically andcannot be switched on even with the AUTObutton.● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-ing at least once a month, to lubricate thesystem gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-crease in the cooling capacity is detected,a Technical Service should be consulted tocheck the system.

● To ensure correct operation, the grilleson both sides of the screen must not be ob-structed.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

Economic use of the air condition-ing

When the air conditioning is switched on, thecompressor consumes engine power and hasinfluence on fuel consumption. Consider thefollowing points in order to have the systemoperating in the minimum possible time.

● If the vehicle interior has overheated due toan excessive solar radiation, it is best to openthe windows or doors to allow the hot air toescape.● While in motion, the air conditioning shouldnot be switched on if the windows are open.

162

Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 168 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, air vents››› Fig. 168 1 should remain open.

● The outlets can be closed or opened sepa-rately using the slats and the air flow directedaccording to need.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell andin the rear area of the interior.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the aircoming from the air vents.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,e.g. when passing through a tunnel or inqueuing traffic, from entering the interior.

If the air distribution is in the thaw position, therecirculation flap will always be open (indica-tor light off).

If the air distribution is switched from any po-sition to the thaw position, recirculation willbe automatically deactivated.

Connecting the recirculationIn any air distribution position except thaw:

● Press the button, the button’s lamp willlight up, indicating that air recirculation insidethe vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculationIn any air distribution position except thaw:

● Press the button again and the button'slamp will go off, indicating that air entry fromthe outside has been activated.

In the thaw position the entry of air into thevehicle interior is always from the outside.

WARNINGIn air recirculation mode, no cold air fromthe outside enters the vehicle interior. If theair conditioner is switched off, the windows »

163

Operation

can quickly mist over. Therefore, neverleave the air recirculation mode switchedon for a long time (risk of accident).

Note● Activating air recirculation automaticallyactivates the button (to prevent the win-dows from fogging). If the temperature reg-ulator is turned to the coldest setting (bluepoint), the air recirculation function and the button are automatically activated.

● If the function is not deactivated bypressing the button, it will deactivate afterapproximately 20 minutes.

Heating and fresh air

Controls

Fig. 169 Heating controls on the dash panel.

Temperature regulator ››› page 165.Blower control. There are four speed set-tings for the blower. The blower should al-ways be set at the lowest speed whendriving slowly.

1

2

Air distribution regulator.Heated rear window.

3

Air distributionControl 3 for setting the flow of air in the re-quired direction.

– Air distribution towards the windscreen inorder to demist.

164

Air conditioning

– Air distribution to upper body.

– Air distribution to footwell.

– Air distribution to the windscreen and thefootwell.

WARNING● For your safety, the windows should nev-er be fogged up or covered with snow orice. This is essential to ensure good visibili-ty. Please familiarise yourself with the cor-rect operation of the heating and ventila-tion system, including the demist/defrostfunctions for the windows.

Note● Please consider the general notes››› page 161.

Functions

Ventilating the vehicle interiorThe desired temperature inside the vehiclecannot be lower than the ambient tempera-ture.

● Turn the temperature selector››› Fig. 169 1 anti-clockwise.

● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels1-4.● Set the airflow to the desired direction usingair distribution control 3 .● Open the relevant air outlets.

Interior heatingMaximum heat output, which is needed to de-frost the windows quickly, is only availablewhen the engine has reached its operatingtemperature.

● Turn the temperature selector››› Fig. 169 1 clockwise to select the re-quired temperature.● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels1-4.● Set the airflow to the desired direction usingair distribution control 3 .● Open the relevant air outlets.

Defrosting the windscreen● Turn the temperature regulator››› Fig. 169 1 clockwise to reach the maxi-mum temperature.● Turn the blower switch 2 to level 4.● Turn air distribution control to .

● Close the central outlets.● Open and turn the side outlets towards thewindows.

Keeping the windscreen and the side win-dows demisted● Turn the temperature regulator››› Fig. 169 1 to the heating zone.● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels2-3.● Turn air distribution control to .● Close the central outlets.● Open and turn the side outlets towards thewindows.

Once the windows are demisted and as apreventive measure, the control 3 can be setin position greater comfort while prevent-ing the windows from misting again.

NoteRemember that the temperature of the en-gine coolant should be optimum to ensurethat the heating system functions correctly(except in vehicles fitted with additionalheating*).

165

Operation

Manual air conditioning*

Controls

Fig. 170 Air conditioning controls on the dash pan-el.

Temperature selector ››› page 166Blower control. There are four speed set-tings for the blower. At low speed, it is rec-ommended to set the blower to a mini-mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh air.Air distribution regulator.Air recirculation button ››› page 163.When the function is activated, a warninglight on the button is turned on.Heated rear window.Button to switch on air conditioning››› page 166. The air conditioning systemonly works when the engine is runningand the fan is switched on.

1

2

3

WARNINGFor your safety, the windows should neverbe fogged up or covered with snow or ice.This is essential to ensure good visibility.Please familiarise yourself with the correctoperation of the heating and ventilationsystem, including the demist/defrost func-tions for the windows.

NotePlease consider the general notes.

Functions

Interior heatingMaximum heat output, which is needed to de-frost the windows quickly, is only availablewhen the engine has reached its operatingtemperature.

● Turn off the cooling system using the button ››› Fig. 170 (the button light turns off).● Turn the temperature regulator 1 to set thedesired temperature inside the vehicle.● Turn the blower switch to any of the settings1-4.

166

Air conditioning

● Set the air distribution regulator 3 to theair flow configuration desired: (towards thewindscreen), (towards the chest), (to-wards the footwell) and (towards the wind-screen and footwell).

Interior coolingWhen the air conditioning is switched on, thetemperature and the air humidity go down.This way, if the outside humidity is extreme,the air conditioning prevents the misting ofthe windows and therefore, comfort is im-proved.

● Turn on the cooling system using the button (the button light turns on).● Turn the temperature control switch untilthe desired interior temperature is reached.

● Turn the blower switch to any of the settings1-4.● Set the air distribution control to the air flowconfiguration desired: (towards the wind-screen), (towards the chest), (towardsthe footwell) and (towards the windscreenand footwell).

Demisting the windscreen● Turn air distribution to .● Turn the fan control to one of the two levelsdepending on the speed required.● Rotate the temperature control to the de-sired level of comfort.● Close the central outlets.

● Open and turn the side outlets towards thewindows.

If the air conditioning does not work, this maybe due to the following reasons:

● The engine is stationary.● The fan blower is switched off.● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C(+37°F).● The air conditioning system compressorhas been temporarily switched off becauseof an increased engine coolant temperature.● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioning checked by a specialised work-shop.

167

Operation

Climatronic*

General notes

Fig. 171 Climatronic: controls.


Climatronic automatically maintains a com-fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-cally regulates the supplied air temperatureand the blower and air distribution levels. Thesystem also allows for the effect of sunlight,so there is no need for manual adjustment.

Automatic operation guarantees maximumcomfort any time of year ››› page 169.

Climatronic descriptionCooling only works if the following conditionsare met:● The engine is running● the outside temperature is above +2°C(+36°F);● turned on.

Starting the ClimatronicWhen a button is pressed, the correspondingfunction will be activated (except for the re-circulation button), switching on the air condi-tioning if it was switched off.

Switching off the Climatronic● Adjust fan power to zero ››› Fig. 171 2 orpress the button.

In order to ensure engines subject to heavyloads are cooled, the air conditioning com-pressor is switched off in the event of highcoolant temperatures.

Recommended setting for all seasons ofthe year● Set the required temperature. We recom-mend +22°C (+72°F).● Press the button ››› Fig. 171.

168

Air conditioning

● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc-ted slightly upwards.

Change between degrees Centigrade anddegrees FahrenheitThe units of degrees can be changed via theEasy Connect system using the / but-ton and the function button SETTINGS >Units > Temperature.

Automatic modeAutomatic mode is used to maintain a con-stant temperature and demist the windowsinside the vehicle.

● Set a interior temperature between +16°C(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc-ted slightly upwards.● Press the button, AUTO is displayed onthe screen.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressingthe air distribution buttons or increasing ordecreasing the blower speed. However, thetemperature remains regulated.

Adjusting the temperature● When you switch on the ignition, control 1››› Fig. 171 can be used to set the required in-terior temperature.

It is possible to select interior temperaturesfrom +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In thisrange the temperature is regulated automati-cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) isselected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If atemperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selec-ted, “HI” is displayed on the screen. At bothextremes, Climatronic works at maximumcooling or heating power, respectively. Thetemperature is not regulated.

In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-larly the footwells) and significant differencesin temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle,sensitive people may catch cold.

Fan regulationClimatronic automatically regulates blowerspeed according to the interior temperature.It is possible, however, to set the blowerspeed to suit requirements.

● Press the 2 buttons to increase or reducefan speed.

Climatronic will switch off when the blowerswitches off.

Turn on windscreen defrost● Press the button ››› Fig. 171.

Switching off windscreen defrosting● Press the button several times orpress the button.

The temperature is regulated automatically.The air output from the vents ››› Fig. 168 2 isincreased.

WARNINGRead and observe the safety warnings ››› in General notes on page 161.

Note● A visit to the specialised service once ayear is recommended to clean the Clima-tronic system.● The interior temperature sensor is at thebottom. Do not cover it with stickers or thelike, as this could have a negative effect onClimatronic operations.

169

Infotainment System

Infotainment System

Introduction

Safety warnings

Infotainment system safety in-structions

Travelling on today's roads requires the driv-er's full attention at all times.

Only operate the radio and its various func-tions when the traffic situation really permitsthis.

WARNING● Before starting the trip, you should famili-arise yourself with the different radio func-tions.● High audio volume may represent a dan-ger to you and to others.● Adjust the volume in a way that you candistinguish surrounding noise, for example,horns and sirens, etc.● Changes to the Infotainment system set-tings should be made when the car is stop-ped, or by a passenger.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries. Operat-ing the Infotainment system can distractyour attention from the traffic.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicleat all times (e.g. emergency services sirensand horns).● Hearing may be impaired if using too higha volume setting, even if only for short peri-ods of time.

WARNINGThe volume level may suddenly changewhen you switch audio source or connect anew audio source.● Lower the base volume before connect-ing or switching audio sources.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situation.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the navigation system.● Adjust your vehicle speed and drivingstyle to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing a datamedium while driving can distract your at-tention from the traffic and cause an acci-dent.

WARNINGConnecting leads for external devices mayobstruct the driver.● Arrange the connecting leads so thatthey do not obstruct the driver.

WARNINGExternal devices that are loose or not prop-erly secured could move around the pas-senger compartment during a sudden driv-ing or braking manoeuvre or an accidentand cause damage or injury.● Never place or fit external devices to thedoors, windscreen, steering wheel, dashpanel, the backs of the seats, on top of ornear the area marked “AIRBAG” or betweenthese areas and the occupants. Externaldevices can cause serious injury in an acci-dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNINGThe armrest may obstruct the driver's armmovements, which could cause an acci-dent and severe injuries.

170

Introduction

● Always keep the armrest closed while thevehicle is in motion.

WARNINGOpening a CD player's housing can lead toinjuries from invisible laser radiation.● Have CD players repaired only by aqualified workshop.

CAUTIONThe Infotainment system can be damagedby the incorrect insertion of a data storagedevice or the insertion of an incompatibledata storage device.● When inserting a data storage device,make sure it is correctly positioned››› page 191.● Applying force may irreparably damagethe memory card slot locking mechanism.● Only use compatible memory cards.● When inserting and removing CDs, al-ways hold them at right angles to the frontof the CD drive without tilting so as not toscratch them.● If a CD is inserted while another is al-ready in the unit or being ejected, the CDdrive may be irreparably damaged. Alwayswait until the data medium is completelyejected.

CAUTIONAny foreign objects stuck to a data storagedevice and non-round media may damagethe CD player.● Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs shouldbe used.– Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel offand damage the drive.

– Do not use printable data media. Prin-ted labels and coverings may peel offand damage the CD drive.

– Do not insert 8-cm “single” CDs or ir-regularly shaped CDs.

– Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, DualDiscs or Flip Discs, as these are thickerthan normal CDs.

CAUTIONThe vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-aged if the volume is too high or the soundis distorted.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

171

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Touch / Media System Colour

Fig. 172 Overview of the controls (this configura-tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 190Touchscreen ››› page 175Vehicle settings ››› page 34,››› page 208Media mode (audio sources)››› page 191

1

2

3

4

Phone Mode ››› page 209Full Link ››› page 179Selecting the main menu ››› page 174Volume. Off/on ››› page 174Slot for memory cards ››› page 194Settings button (search and selection)››› page 174

5

6

7

8

9

10

172

Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 173 Overview of the controls (this configura-tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 190Touchscreen ››› page 175Navigation Mode ››› page 198Media mode (audio sources)››› page 191Full Link ››› page 179Volume. Off/on ››› page 174

1

2

3

4

5

6

Settings button (search and selection)››› page 174Phone Mode ››› page 209Vehicle settings ››› page 34,››› page 208Voice controlProximity sensor ››› page 178Selecting the main menu ››› page 174

7

8

9

10

11

12

173

Infotainment System

General instructions for use

Introduction


If the setup is changed, this may change thedisplay on the screen and in some cases, theInfotainment system may behave in a mannerdifferent to that described in this manual.

Note● Lightly pressing the buttons or brieflypressing the touchscreen is sufficient tooperate the Infotainment system.● Not all listed function buttons and func-tions described may be available due tothe device software used in your market.The equipment is not faulty if a functionbutton is missing from the screen.● Due to country-specific legislation, cer-tain functions may not be available on thescreen when the vehicle is travelling abovea certain speed.● Using a mobile telephone in the vehiclemay cause noise from the vehicle loud-speakers.

● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-ume of the audio source is automaticallylowered when reverse gear is selected. Thevolume can be lowered in the menu Sound> Volume.

Diagram of the menus

The Infotainment system touchscreen can beused to select the different main menus.

Press the infotainment button ››› Fig. 172 7 , or button ››› Fig. 173 12 toopen the menu summary.

The display of the touchscreen's main menucan be switched between “grid” and “carou-sel” via the Settings/System > Displaymenu.

Infotainment rotary/push knobs

Rotary/push knobsThe left-hand rotary knob is the volumecontrol or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but-ton.

Infotainment buttonsThe buttons on the unit are shown in thismanual with the word “infotainment button”and their function within a rectangle, for ex-ample, the infotainment button .

The Infotainment buttons are used by press-ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

To manually switch the Infotainment systemon and off, briefly press the rotary knob ››› Fig. 172 8 , ››› Fig. 173 6 .

When switching on, the system starts-up withthe last set volume, provided that this doesnot exceed the preset maximum start-up vol-ume. Select Sound > Volume.

The unit will switch off automatically whenthe key is removed from the ignition or whenthe on/off button is pressed (depending onthe equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-fotainment system is switched on again, it willswitch off automatically after approximately30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note● The Infotainment system is a part of thevehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-cle.

174

Introduction

● If the battery has been disconnected, theignition must be activated before switchingon the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume ormuting the soundRaise the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel downward.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-ume bar on the screen. The volume can becontrolled using the steering wheel controls.In this case, the changes in volume are dis-played on the instrument panel by a volumebar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settingsand adjustments. Select Menu > Sound >Volume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound● Turn the volume control anti-clockwiseuntil it displays .

Muting the Infotainment system sound stopsthe media source that is playing The screendisplays .

NoteIf the base volume has been considerablyincreased to play a certain audio source,lower the volume again before switching toanother audio source.

Handling the function buttons anddisplay instructions

Fig. 175 View of some of the function buttonson the screen.

Fig. 176 Sound setup menu

The Infotainment system comes equippedwith a touchscreen.

Active areas of the screen that call up a cer-tain function are called “function buttons”.These buttons are operated by briefly press-ing the screen or by pressing and holding.

The function buttons appear in the instruc-tions with the label “function button” and abutton symbol inside a rectangle .

Function buttons start functions or open sub-menus. The currently selected menu is dis-played in the title bar ››› Fig. 175 A of thesubmenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se-lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-ages displayed on the screenThe size of the navigation map image››› page 198 and, for example, photos when »

175

Infotainment System

viewing images ››› page 191 can be en-larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re-duce the image displayed by moving two fin-gers.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

AThe title bar shows the selected menuand, where applicable, other functionbuttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

C

The scroll bar is shown on the right and itssize depends on the entries in the list.Move the bar on the screen by pressinglightly and without lifting the finger, see››› page 176, Opening list entries andsearching in lists.

D

Movable cursor: Move the cursor aroundthe screen by pressing lightly and withoutlifting the finger.

OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-sition, press that spot on the screen.

Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, leftand right arrows to move the sound ac-cording to preference. The cursor D willmove.

OR: Press the central button to centre thestereo sound in the centre of the passen-ger compartment

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

Press it on some lists to move up a level,one by one.

BACK

Press to return from the submenus one ata time to the main menu or to undo theentries made.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens(options window) which displays othersetup options.

/

Some functions or messages are accom-panied by a check box and are activated or deactivated by pressing saidcheck box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

× Press to close a pop-up window or an in-put window.

/ Press them to change the setup adjust-ments one at a time.

Move the slider around the screen bypressing it lightly and without lifting yourfinger.

Opening list entries and searchingin lists

Fig. 177 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated bypressing them on the screen directly or by us-ing the adjustment button ››› Fig. 172 10 ,››› Fig. 173 7 .

Mark list entries using the setup buttonand open them● Turn the setup button to mark the entries onthe list with a rectangle one by one and con-tinue searching the list in this manner.● Press the setup button to activate themarked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)The scroll bar is shown on the right and itssize depends on the entries in the list››› Fig. 177 1 .

176

Introduction

● Briefly press the screen above or below thescroll marker.● OR: Place a finger over the scroll markerand without lifting it, move it around thescreen. Lift your finger off the screen whenyou reach the desired position.● OR: Place your finger in the centre of thescreen and without lifting it, move it aroundthe screen. Lift your finger off the screenwhen you reach the desired position.

Input masks with on-screen keypad

Fig. 178 Input window with on-screen keypad.

Input windows with on-screen keypad areused for functions such as entering an entryname, selecting a destination address or en-tering a search term for searching long lists.

The function buttons listed below are notavailable in all countries or for all topics.

Subsequent chapters only explain thosefunctions that differ from those in the screenshown in the figure.

The input line with cursor is located in the topbar of the screen. All inputs are displayedhere.

Input windows for “free text input”In the input masks for open text, you may en-ter letters, numbers and special characters inany combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry(e.g. selection of a destination address)It is only possible to select a sequence of let-ters, numbers and special characters thatmatches a stored entry.

Suggestions for matching destinations ap-pear depending on the characters entered inthe input line ››› Fig. 178 4 . In the case ofcompound names, it is necessary to enter aspace.

If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries,the number of remaining entries is displayedafter the input line 3 . Pressing this functionbutton displays these remaining entries in alist.

Overview of the function buttons

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

Lettersand dig-its

Press them to copy them into the inputline.

1

Press to change the keypad to anotherlanguage. Keypad languages can be se-lected from the menu System set-tings > Language.

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

3Displays the number and opens the list ofremaining selectable entries that matchthe entered text.

4 Scroll bar, the size of which depends onthe number of matching entries.

5

Hold and press to display a pop-up win-dow with the special characters based onsaid letter. Press the desired character toenter it. Some special characters can bewritten out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).

Press to enter a space.

Press to delete characters in the input linefrom right to left.

Press and hold to delete several charac-ters.

BACK

Press to close the input window.

177

Infotainment System

Proximity sensors3 Valid for: Media System Plus/Navi System

The Infotainment system is equipped with anintegrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 173 11 .

The image on the screen changes from dis-play mode to automatic operation when yourhand moves toward it. In operation mode, thefunction buttons are automatically highligh-ted to facilitate their use.

Additional information and displayoptions

The displays appearing on the screen mayvary depending on the settings, and may dif-fer from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, forexample, the current time and outside tem-perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 179 Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help youto set up your Infotainment system the firsttime you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will appear››› Fig. 179 if any parameters have not beenset or if the NEVER function button has notbeen pressed.

Function button: function

CLOSE

Closes the Configuration Wizard, andthe main menu or last mode in whichyou used the Infotainment system willappear. The next time you switch onthe system, the Configuration Wizardwill start up again.


NEVER

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. If you want to perform the initialsystem setup, you must enter via Sys-tem setup and select Configura-tion Wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

A

Press to configure the time and date (ifit has a navigation system it will beconfigured automatically with theGPS).

B

Press to search and store to memorythe radio stations that have the bestreception at that moment on all avail-able bands (AM, FM and DAB).

C Press to link your mobile telephone tothe Infotainment system.

D a)Press to select your home address us-ing your current position or by man-ually entering an address.

PREVIOUS NEXT

To go to the previous or next parameterto set.When a parameter has been set, theonly way to reset it is from the mainmenu, clicking on it, and not using thePrevious/Next buttons.When setting any parameter, a confir-mation mark will appear on it .

178

Connectivity


FINISH

Once one or more settings have beenapplied, click on this in the main menuof the wizard to confirm and finalizethe settings.If there are any parameters you havenot set, the next time you connect theInfotainment system, the Initial Config-uration Wizard will start up.

a) Only valid for Navi System.

ConnectivityData transfer

This communication can allow data to beread and/or written.

From the SETTINGS menu > Data transferfor SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti-vate/deactivate the function and a dropdownmenu called Operation via apps whichcontrols the level of interaction between theapps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description


The Full Link system provides a way of bring-ing together technologies that allow commu-nication between the Infotainment Systemand mobile devices:

● MirrorLink®

● Android Auto™● Apple CarPlay™

InterfacesTo access the Full Link system, press the info-tainment button / or press the infotain-ment button / and then pressFull Link .

The connection to Full Link is made through aUSB interface.

WARNINGIf a mobile terminal is not secured or is in-correctly secured in the vehicle, it couldmove around the passenger compartmentin the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre,emergency stop or accident, resulting in in-jury.● While driving, mobile terminals must besecurely fastened in position, outside theairbag deployment zones, or safely stowedaway.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● SEAT recommends the use of the Appsthat SEAT provides for this vehicle.● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you mustactivate the option , Settings/System >Data transfer for SEAT apps. »

179

Infotainment System

● The interaction level of the Apps on thesystem must be: ALLOW.● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-cations from improper use.● Never make modifications to the applica-tions.● Consult the instruction manual for themobile terminal.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Dis-tracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION● In areas where special regulations applyor the use of mobile terminals is forbidden,the mobile terminal must be switched off atall times. The radiation produced by themobile terminal when switched on may in-terfere with sensitive technical and medi-cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal-function or damage to the equipment.● SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-age caused to the vehicle as a result of theuse of applications that are of poor qualityor are defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of data

during transmission or the improper use ofmobile terminals.

Note● Use of Full Link technology may result inhigh consumption of your 3G/4G data plan.● SEAT recommends having a high batterycharge on the device when connected toFull Link.● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,the “Date and time” should be correctlyconfigured. Select Menu > Settings/Sys‐tem > Date and Time.● SEAT applications are designed to com-municate with the vehicle and interact withit via the Full Link connection, therefore itsfunctionality is linked to the mobile devicebeing connected via USB.● You can find further information on thetechnical requirements, compatible devi-ces, suitable applications and availabilityat www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 181 Message on Infotainment systemscreen.

To unblock this feature, you must obtain theaccessory from your SEAT dealer. Otherwise,a message like this will appear on the screenwhenever you select the feature ››› Fig. 181.

180

Connectivity

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 182 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not haveFull Link in your vehicle you can acquire itas an accessory at your Authorised Serv-ice.Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

1

2

websites to confirm whether your phoneis compatible with the system.Mirror Link– Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones– MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher– Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-vice.

Android Auto– Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/– Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher– Install Android Auto™ appApple CarPlay– Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay– iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher– Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:use the USB cable approved and sup-plied by the phone's official distributor.

3

181

Infotainment System

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 183 Full Link Setup

Fig. 184 Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is notnecessary to establish the connection be-tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-sary to enable all of the app features1).

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

● Switch on the Infotainment system● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle'sUSB port using a USB cable ››› page 214.● In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se-lect Activate data transfer for SEATapps ››› Fig. 183:

Finally, a message will appear stating thatdata transfer will commence when the deviceis connected. Please note that data is trans-ferred over connections between your vehi-cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-ted, the technology compatible with your de-vice can be used.

NoteDepending on your smartphone, it mayhave to be unlocked for the connection tooccur.

What should I do if it does not con-nect?

Restart the mobile device

Check the USB cable visually.Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Checkthat both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam-aged or worn.

Visually checkthat the USB portsare properly con-nected.Check that the ve-hicle and deviceUSB connectionsare not damagedand/or worn.

Clean the USB ports (deviceand vehicle).

Try another compatible mo-bile device.

Have the USB port replaced ata SEAT Authorised Service.

Have the mobile device re-paired or replace it.

Try another compatible mobile device.

1) Using the data connection to transfer thesmartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-tional charges. Please check the charges withyour operator.

182

Connectivity

Pairing of portable devices sup-porting the MirrorLink®, AndroidAuto™ and/or Apple CarPlay™technologies

Fig. 185 Full Link menu

CarouselWhen you enter the Full Link context for thefirst time, the technologies available for pair-ing the portable device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-tem will offer you the technologies availablefor establishing a connection with your mo-bile phone.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-tween two devices with different operating

systems, a choice will be presented for whichone to make the connection with ››› Fig. 185.

View of the device listiPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-Play™.

There are some Android devices that supportMirrorLink® and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link setup


Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allowsthe exchange of information between the vehicle andapplications authorised by SEAT.

Last ModeIf a session using one technology ends with-out the disconnection being made from theInfotainment system (simply by disconnect-ing the cable) then when the device is nextconnected to it, the session will start withoutthe user being required to take any action1).

InformationConsult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a countryThird party applications

For further information:

MirrorLink®:www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto™:www.android.com/auto

Note● In order to use Android Auto™ technologyit is necessary to download the AndroidAuto™ application, located on GooglePlay™.● Only compatible applications can beused, in accordance with the technologyconnected.

1.2.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un-locked in order to establish the connection.

183

Infotainment System

MirrorLink®

Fig. 186 Function buttons in the general viewof compatible applications.

Fig. 187 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables com-munication between a portable device andthe Infotainment system via USB.

Using it makes it possible to display and man-age the content and functions displayed on

the portable device on the Infotainment sys-tem screen.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only specially adapted applications can beused ››› in Full Link technology descrip-tion on page 179.

RequirementsIn order to use MirrorLink®, the following re-quirements must be met:

● The mobile device must be compatible withMirrorLink®.● The mobile device must be connected tothe Infotainment system via USB.● Depending on the mobile device used, asuitable application must be installed for theuse of MirrorLink® on the device.

Initiating the connection● In order to initiate the connection with themobile device, it is simply necessary to con-nect it to the Infotainment system via the USBconnection.● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages


Full Link To return to the Full Link mainmenu.


CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps.Then press the apps to beclosed or the Close all functionbutton to close all the open ap-plications.

1 : 1 Press to change to the mobiledevice screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

››› Fig. 187 1 Press to return to the MirrorLink®

main menu.

››› Fig. 187 2

Press to display all the functionbuttons in the lower or upperright-hand margin of thescreen.

››› Fig. 187 / Allows buttons 1 and 2 to behidden or shown.››› Fig. 173 12

MirrorLink® setup


Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror-Link® pop-up windows in applications that support it.

184

Connectivity

Apple CarPlay™*3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones onlysupport Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a mobile telephoneand the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operatethe mobile telephone on the Infotainmentsystem screen.

RequirementsIn order to use Apple CarPlay™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● Make sure that you do not have AppleCarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set-tings > General > Restrictions >CarPlay > ON.● The mobile device must be compatible withApple CarPlay™.● The mobile device must be connected tothe Infotainment system via USB.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with themobile device, it is simply necessary to con-nect it to the Infotainment system via the USBconnection.

● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.

● If you start the session using AppleCarPlay™ technology, it will not be possibleto pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol-lowing message will appear in the mainPhone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlayfirst, before you can connect an-other mobile telephone.

Holding down the button will start theApple™ voice “engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a portable deviceand the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operatethe mobile telephone on the Infotainmentsystem screen.

RequirementsIn order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● The mobile device must be compatible withAndroid Auto™.

● The mobile device must be connected tothe Infotainment system via USB.● The Android Auto™ application should al-ready be downloaded and installed on themobile device.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with themobile device, it is simply necessary to con-nect it to the Infotainment system via the USBconnection, and to be sure to follow the in-structions of the device being paired.

● The first connection to Android Auto™ mustbe done while the vehicle is stationary.● Once the first pop-up window about ac-cepting data transfer between the car andthe device has been accepted, a messagewill appear requesting that you check yourmobile device for the confirmations neededto pair it with the Infotainment system.● If you are initiating the session usingAndroid Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-bile telephone connects automatically viaBluetooth® to the Infotainment system tele-phone and it will not be possible to pair an-other mobile telephone via Bluetooth®.

Holding down the button will start theAndroid™ voice “engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the Return to SEATbutton. »

185

Infotainment System

NoteSome mobile devices require a change inthe USB connection mode in order to useAndroid Auto™.● Make sure that your mobile is in “MediaTransfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it isconnected by USB to the Infotainment sys-tem.

NoteAndroid Auto™ requires the use of Google™services, as well as certain basic applica-tions of the Android system.● Make sure that you always have Google™services updated in order to use this tech-nology.

Frequently asked questions aboutFull Link

What is the connection method? USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? No. The USB cable supplied with the device shouldbe used.

Is there a navigation option? Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Linktechnologies if the technology is available in yourcountry and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Linksystem navigator (via telephone) instead of an-other navigator? Benefits: Daily updates.Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages? With certified apps, you can answer but not sendvoice messages.

What apps are visible while driving? Depending on the technology:– for MirrorLink®: SEAT-certified apps and CCC,– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible apps? Compatible apps can be found on the following links:www.mirrorlink.com/www.android.com/auto/www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download apps? On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® andon Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re-paired? If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal-er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you shouldsee your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified? This depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all the countries andregions where SEAT operates.

What are the differences between MirrorLink®,Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ andApple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ isdesigned for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEATmodel? No, this is not possible.

Where can I find more information about FullLink? If you have any questions, please see our Innova-tion/Connectivity sections on our website:www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail [email protected]

186

Connectivity

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /Colour


The SEAT Media Control1) app can be usedto remotely operate some partial functions inRadio mode, Media mode and Navigationmode. Information can be exchanged be-tween a device and the Infotainment System.

Each one of the functions is operated bymeans of a Tablet or partially by means of amobile phone.

Operating requirements:● A tablet or mobile phone.● The app must be available on the corre-sponding device.● There must be a WLAN connection betweenthe Infotainment System and the device. Se-lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >

Share connection via WLAN > Configu-ration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-vated:

● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox toactivate/deactivate the function and a drop-down menu called Operation via appswhich controls the level of interaction be-tween the apps and the system. Select Menu> Settings/System > Transfer datafrom mobile devices.

You can obtain information about technicalrequirements on the SEAT website or at SEATdealerships.

Telephone functions are not part of the func-tions of this app.

Data transmission and controlfunctions

Fig. 189 SEAT Media Control Main menu

The Infotainment System can be operatedfrom other seats in the vehicle as follows, withthe help of SEAT Media Control:

● Radio remote control.● Multimedia playback remote control.

The following information can be exchangedbetween a device and the Infotainment Sys-tem, depending on the country and theequipment:

● Navigation destinations.● Traffic information.● Social media contents.● Audio transmission. »

1) Availability depends on the country.187

Infotainment System

● Vehicle data.● Location-specific information, for example,POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /Colour

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 188, Setting up WLAN connec-tion sharing.

The Infotainment System can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external wireless deviceto provide Internet to the devices connectedto the hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 189,Setting up Internet access.

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,SEAT recommends the use of a flat ratemobile phone deal for data transmission.Mobile phone operators can provide therelevant information.

● The exchange of data packages over theinternet may generate additional costs, de-pending on your mobile phone rate, partic-ularly if you are abroad (for example,roaming rates).

Setting up WLAN connection shar-ing

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with 8 wireless de-vices.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Press the Infotainment button and thenpress the Settings / System menu.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on theInfotainment System. To do so, press theWLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on thewireless device that is to be connected. Ifnecessary, refer to the manufacturer’s in-struction manual.● Activate the mobile device assignment onthe Infotainment System. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and activate

the checkbox.

● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the wireless device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

WPA2 encryption automatical-ly generates a network key.

Network key automatically gen-erated. Press the function button tomanually change the network key. Thenetwork key must have a minimum of 8characters and a maximum of 63.

WLAN Network name (maximum of 32characters).

Activatethe checkbox to deactivate the visibilityof the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the wire-less device.

Repeat this process to connect other wirelessdevices.

Security level:

Network key:

SSID:

Do not send network name (SSID):

188

Connectivity

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN) ››› page 197.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router2)

until the warning light on the router startsflashing.● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on theWLAN router until the WLAN light on the routerstarts flashing.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed.

Repeat this process to connect other wirelessdevices.

Setting up Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLANhotspot of an external wireless device to es-tablish an internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the Infotainment button and thenpress the Settings menu; OR access Media orSEAT Media Control mode and press the SET-

TINGS menu.● Press the WLAN menu and then enter Inter-net access settings on your phone and acti-vate the checkbox.● Press the Find function button and selectthe wireless device you want from the list.● If necessary, enter the network key of thewireless device in the Infotainment Systemand confirm with OK.

To manually enter the net-work settings of an external wireless(WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the wire-less device.

Manual settings:

NoteDue to the large number of different wire-less devices in existence, it is not possibleto guarantee fault-free operation of allfunctions.

1) This function depends on the equipment andthe country in question.2) If the WLAN router does not support WPS thenetwork must be configured manually.

189

Infotainment System

Operating modes

Radio

Related video

Fig. 190 Radio mode

Radio main menu

Fig. 191 Radio main menu.

Fig. 192 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 1 , ››› Fig. 173 1 to open the Ra-dio main menu ››› Fig. 191.

Radio main menu function buttons


1To change the group of memory but-tons slide a finger over the memorybuttons from left to right or vice-versa

BAND Allows you to select the frequencyband.

STATIONLIST

Opens the list of currently receivableradio from the active frequency band.

MANUAL Allows you to select the frequencymanually.

VIEWAllows you to select the informationshown on the screen. Only available inDAB mode.


SETTINGS Opens the setup menu of the activefrequency band (FM, AM or DAB).

/

Selects the previous or next stored sta-tion or of the station list. This settingcan be changed in the Radio settingsmenu (FM, AM, DAB).

1 to 18 Memory buttons ››› page 191.

SCANStops the scan function (only visiblewhen the function is under way). It canbe activated in the settings menu (FM,AM and DAB).

Information and possible icons

Display: Meaning

A

View the frequency or the name of thestation and, where applicable, the radiotext. The name of the radio station andthe radio text will only be displayed ifequipped with RDS and if it is active.

RDSOff

The RDS radio data service is deactiva-ted.

TPTraffic information can be retrieved: se-lect Radio > Settings > Trafficstation.

No stations with traffic news are availa-ble.

The radio station is stored on a memorybutton.

190

Operating modes

Display: Meaning

AF off The tracking of alternative frequencies isdisabled.

Note● The availability of AM and DAB bands de-pends on the country and/or equipment. Inthe event that the AM and DAB bands arenot available, the BAND function buttontext will not be shown.● Bear in mind that being underground, intunnels, in areas with tall buildings ormountains can interfere with radio signals.● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.

Memory buttons

Fig. 193 Radio main menu.

In the Radio main menu, you can store sta-tions from all available frequency wave-lengths on the numbered function buttons.These function buttons are called “memorybuttons”.

Functions of the memory buttons

Selecting thestation fromthe memorybuttons

Press the memory button corre-sponding to the desired station.

The stored stations can only beplayed by pressing the corre-sponding memory button providedit can be received at your currentlocation.

Change mem-ory bank

Move your finger over the screenfrom left to right or vice-versa.

OR: Press one of the function but-tons ››› Fig. 193 A

The memory buttons are displayedin three memory banks.

Storing thestation on thememory but-tons

Keep and hold the desired memorybutton until an audible signal isheard, the station will be stored onthis memory button. You can alsostore a station from a station list.

Functions of the memory buttons

Storing thestation logo onthe memorybuttons

A station logo can be assigned tothe stations stored on the memorybuttons.A logo is automatically assignedfrom the database if the Advancedradio settings option is enableda).A logo can also be assigned man-ually from an external data source(USB/SD card).

a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colourmodel.

Media

Introduction


“Media sources” are audio sources contain-ing audio files on various different data stor-age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, externalMP3 player). These audio files can be played »

191

Infotainment System

by the Infotainment system via their corre-sponding drives or audio input sockets (inter-nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi-media socket etc.).

CopyrightAudio and video files on data storage devicesare usually protected by intellectual propertyrights, as per the corresponding national andinternational laws. Be aware of the current le-gal provisions!

Note● Do not use memory card adapters.● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

Media main menu

Fig. 195 Media main menu.

Using the Media main menu, different mediasources can be selected and played.

● Press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 4 , ››› Fig. 173 4 to open the Me-dia main menu ››› Fig. 195.

It will continue playing the last media sourceselected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicatedon the dropdown list when pressing theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 195.

If there is no available media source, the Me-dia main menu is displayed.

Function buttons of the main Media menu


SOURCE

Indicates the media source beingplayed. Press to select another me-dia source ››› page 193.

CD : Internal CD drive››› page 194.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo-ry card ››› page 194.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor-age device connected to the USBport ››› page 195.

AUX : External audio source con-nected to the AUX-IN multimediasocket ››› page 195.

BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio››› page 196.

SELECTIONOpens the track list. Depending onthe level, track list, folders orsource.

/ Changes track in Media mode orfast forward/rewind ››› Fig. 195.

Playback stops. The functionbutton changes to .

Playback is resumed. The func-tion button changes to .

SETTINGS Opens the Media Settingsmenu.

192

Operating modes


REPEAT

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are onthe same memory level as the trackbeing played at that moment. If inthe Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders op-

tion is enabled, it also includes thesubfolders.

REPEAT

The current track will be repeated.

MIX

Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are onthe same memory level as the trackbeing played at that moment. If inthe Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders op-

tion is enabled, it also includes thesubfolders.

Messages and symbols on the Media mainmenu

Display: Meaning

A

Displays information about the artistname, album name and song title (CDtext , ID3 tag on compressed audiofiles).

Audio CD: displays track information. Ifno data is available, it only displaysTrack and the number corresponding tothe position it occupies on the data stor-age device.

B

Album cover display: If there are variouscovers within the same folder/album, thesystem only displays one of them.It prioritizes displaying the covers in thefollowing manner:1. Cover embedded in the file(s).2. Image in file folder.3. Default icon of the connected device.

C

The playing time so far and time remain-ing in minutes and seconds. In the caseof audio files with variable bit rates (VBR)the remaining time may vary.

TPa)The TP function is active and can beused: select Radio > Settings >Traffic programme (TP).

a)There are no traffic stations available:select Radio > Settings > Traf-fic programme (TP).

a) Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note● When the media source is inserted, play-ing will not start automatically; it is neces-sary for the user to select the source. Norwill the media source change when it isejected.

Changing the Media source

Fig. 196 MEDIA mode: change media source.

● From the Media main menu, press the / ››› Fig. 172 4 , ››› Fig. 173 4 Info-

tainment button repeatedly to cycle throughthe available media sources.● OR: From the Media main menu, press theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 196 and se-

lect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources notselected are shown as deactivated (in grey). »

193

Infotainment System

When a Media source that has already beenplayed is selected again, playback is re-sumed from the point at which it was stop-ped.

Optional Media playback sources

Function button: media source

CD Internal CD drive ››› page 194.

SD CARD 1SD memory card ››› page 194.

SD CARD 2 *

USB 1 External data storage device con-nected to the USB port ››› page 195.USB 2 *

AUXExternal audio source connectedto the AUX-IN multimedia socket››› page 195.

BT AUDIO Bluetooth® audio ››› page 196.

WLAN *a) External audio source connectedby WLAN ››› page 197


NoteThe Media source can be changed in theTrack list view: select Media > View.

Insert or eject a CD3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/NaviSystem

Fig. 197 Slots for data storage devices in theglove compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating theunit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert orchange the data storage device before mov-ing off!

The CD drive can play audio CDs and audiodata CDs.

Inserting a CD● Hold the CD with the printed side facing up.● Push the CD into the slot ››› Fig. 197 3 tothe point where it is drawn in automatically.

Ejecting a CD● Press button 1 .

● The CD in the drive will be ejected andmust be removed within approximately10 seconds.

Insert or eject a memory card

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two slots for SDcards.

Inserting a memory cardInsert the compatible memory card, bevellededge first and with the label face up (con-tacts face down), into slot ››› Fig. 197 2 , untilproperly inserted.

If a memory card cannot be inserted, makesure it is positioned correctly and is compati-ble with the unit.

Removing a memory cardThe inserted memory cards must be pre-pared for removal.

● From the main Media menu, press theSETTINGS button to open the Media Set-tings menu or press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 7 , ››› Fig. 173 12 and

then press Settings / System , to open menuSystem settings.● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

194

Operating modes

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the memorycard from the system, the function button be-comes inactive (grey colour).● Press the inserted memory card. The mem-ory card “jumps” to the eject position.● Remove the memory card.

Unreadable memory cardIf a memory card is inserted and the datacannot be read, the relevant warning ap-pears.

External data storage device con-nected to the USB port

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two USB con-nections ››› page 214.

Audio files on an external data storage deviceconnected to the USB port can be playedand controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external datastorage devices, this means USB mass stor-age devices containing supported audio files,such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed andplayed. Other files are ignored.

Instructions and restrictionsCompatibility with Apple™ devices and othermedia players depends on the unit.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks with a capacity greaterthan 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32file system in some circumstances. You willfind the necessary software and informationon the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions andlimitations regarding requirements for mediasources.

DisconnectingAny connected data storage devices mustbe prepared before their disconnection in or-der to remove them.

● From the main Media menu, press theSETTINGS button to open the Media Set-tings menu or press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 7 , ››› Fig. 173 12 and

then press Settings / System , to open menuSystem settings.● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. After correctly ejecting the data stor-age device from the system, the function but-ton becomes inactive (grey colour).

● Now the data storage device can be dis-connected.

Note● Do not connect an external media playerat the same time to play music via Blue-tooth® and via the USB port with the In-fotainment system, as this could causeplayback limitations.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.● If a connected device is not recognised,disconnect all the connected devices andtry connecting the device again.● Do not use memory card adaptors, USBextension cords or USB hubs!

External audio source connected tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the equipment and countrythere may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket››› page 214.

The connected external audio source isplayed over the vehicle speakers and cannotbe controlled via the Infotainment systemcontrols.

The connection of an external audio source isindicated by AUX on the screen. »

195

Infotainment System

Connecting an external audio source tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● Connect the external audio source to theAUX-IN multimedia socket.● Start playback on the external audiosource.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select AUX .

Connecting an external audiosource via Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® Audio mode allows you to listen toaudio files being played on a Bluetooth® au-dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-ted via Bluetooth® (audio playback by Blue-tooth®) over the vehicle speakers.

Conditions● The Bluetooth® audio source must supportthe A2DP Bluetooth® profile.● In the Bluetooth Settings menu the Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must

be on. Select Phone > Settings > Blue-tooth.

Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the externalBluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tele-phone).● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select BT audio .● Press Search for new device in order to con-nect an external Bluetooth® audio source forthe first time ››› page 210.● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audiosource from the list.● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theBluetooth® audio source regarding the rest ofthe procedure.

You may still need to manually start playbackon the Bluetooth® source.

When playback on the Bluetooth® audiosource is stopped, the Infotainment systemremains in Bluetooth® Audio mode.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the Bluetooth® audiosource can be controlled via the Infotainmentsystem depends on the connected Blue-tooth® audio source.

The available functions will depend on theBluetooth® Audio profile that the connectedexternal player supports.

With media players that support the AVRCPBluetooth® profile, playback on the Blue-tooth® audio source can be automaticallystarted or stopped when the unit is switchedto Bluetooth® Audio mode or to a different au-dio source. In addition, it is possible to view orchange the track via the Infotainment system.

Note● Due to the large number of possible Blue-tooth® audio sources, it is not possible toguarantee fault-free operation of all de-scribed functions.● Do not connect an external media playerto play music via Bluetooth® and via theUSB port ››› page 195 at the same timewith the Infotainment system, as this couldcause playback limitations.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.

196

Operating modes

Connecting an external audiosource through WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media SystemTouch/Colour

WLAN allows wireless connection between anexternal audio source (for example a smartphone) and the Infotainment system.

To use this connection, the device being con-nected must have an app compatible withthe UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-cation protocol, allowing the app to providethe system with the available media content.

Conditions● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installedon the mobile device.● Having the Enable WLAN connection op-tion active, which can be found in the wirelessconnection configuration.● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-ment system using a password generated bythe system. The pairing must be done fromthe mobile device that you wish to connect tothe Infotainment system.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-back of the WLAN audio source.

● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select WLAN .● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theWLAN audio source regarding the rest of theprocedure.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the WLAN audio sourcecan be controlled via the Infotainment systemdepends on the connected WLAN audiosource and the application used.

Note● The Infotainment system does not pro-vide an internet connection, it only estab-lishes a wireless connection between themobile device and said system.● Via the WLAN, only the connection be-tween the device and the Infotainment sys-tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-pends on the application itself.

Images3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/NaviSystem

Using the Images menu, image files can beviewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SDcard).

● Press the Infotainment button ››› Fig. 173 12 and then press the Imagesfunction button.● Press the SOURCE function button to selectthe source where the pictures in question arelocated.


SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.

The image viewed was obtained viaGPS localisation and upon pressingthis function button, the navigatormenu opens to start a route to thisdestination.

/ Rotate the view of the image to theleft or the right.

Reset the view of the image.

To stop the playback of a slideshow.The function button changes to .

To continue the playback of a slide-show. The function buttonchanges to . »

197

Infotainment System


/

To change to the PREVIOUS orNEXT image.

The same function can be per-formed by sliding your finger hori-zontally across the screen.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the viewTo enlarge or reduce the view of the imagedisplayed:

● Turn the adjustment knob.● OR: Stretch or reduce the image on thescreen using 2 fingers.

Rotating the view/imageTo rotate an image, in addition to the buttonsprovided for this ( / ), you can also presson the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and,while continuing to press with your thumb,slide another finger (e.g. your index finger)around it like a compass either clockwise (torotate the image to the right) or anti-clock-wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro-tate the image 90° with respect to its currentposition.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Navigation1)

Introduction


General informationUsing all the data available, the Infotainmentsystem calculates the optimum route to thedestination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also betaken into account in the route calculation(dynamic route guidance ››› page 206).

Spoken instructions and visual guidance onthe navigation unit and on the instrumentpanel will direct you to your destination.

CAUTIONThe navigation announcements playedmay be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-datenavigation data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-ceive any data from GPS satellites (due to adense tree canopy, underground car park),navigation can still continue using the vehiclesensors.

Possible limitations in navigationIn areas that are not or are only partially digi-tised on the data storage device, the Infotain-ment system will still attempt to provide routeguidance.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System198

Operating modes

Navigation area and updating navigationdataRoads and streets are subject to constantchange (e.g. new roads, changes to streetnames and building numbers). Therefore, ifthe navigation data is not updated, then er-rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid-ance.

SEAT recommends updating navigation dataon a regular basis. Up to date navigation datacan be downloaded from www.seat.com oracquired at a SEAT dealer.

Updating and using navigation da-ta from an SD card

The Infotainment system always requires thenavigation data that is currently valid for thisunit in order to allow all functions to be usedin full. Using an old version may lead to errorsduring navigation.

Updating navigation dataThe current navigation data can be downloa-ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEATdealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet atwww.seat.com.

Using navigation data● Insert the memory card ››› page 194.● Do not remove the memory card while test-ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains validnavigation data, the following message ap-pears: “The source contains a validnavigation database”. It is now possible tonavigate with the memory card data. Whenthe memory card is no longer needed by thehardware, it will be prepared for removal››› page 194.

Note● The inserted memory card must be pre-pared before it is ejected ››› page 194.● Press the Infotainment button ››› Fig. 173 12 ; then press Settings/Systemto open the System settings menu.● Navigation is not possible without the SDcard.● Do not remove the memory card whilethe navigation data is in use. This coulddamage the memory card!● The navigation memory card may not beused as memory for other files. The info-tainment system will not recognise the filessaved.● SEAT recommends only using originalSEAT memory cards to use navigation data.The use of other memory cards could limitits operation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 199 Navigation main menu

The Navigation main menu allows you to se-lect a new destination, call up a previouslyused or stored destination and search forpoints of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu● Press the Infotainment system button ››› Fig. 173 3 to open the last menu that wasopen in navigation.

Function buttons and messages on themain Navigation menu


A The split screen is displayed ››› page 204.

B Messages and function buttons on the mapdisplay ››› page 205. »

199

Infotainment System


NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination››› page 200.

ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 201.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-tions ››› page 202.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-tions and restaurants) within a particular search area››› page 203.

VIEW To modify or activate or deactivate the splitscreen and show POI ››› Fig. 199 A ››› page 204.

SETTINGS Open the Navigation Settingsmenu ››› Fig. 199.

New destination (enter destina-tion)

Fig. 200 Search screen.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theNew destination function button.● Press the Options function button and se-lect the required type of destination (Search,Address, POI on the route or On map).● Using voice control*, if you say Town, streetand number, without pauses, and then the in-struction “Start Route Guidance” a route tothe given destination will start.

SearchSearch for addresses and Points of Interestusing the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 200.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,the full details must be entered. You can alsosearch for points of interest by names or cat-egories. When necessary, enter the name ofthe city to refine the search.

››› Fig. 200

A Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),which allow you to move within the text.

AddressAfter entering a country and a town, you canstart navigating towards the centre of the se-lected town.

When narrowing down the destination ad-dress, please note that every entry restrictsthe available range of subsequent selections.For instance, if the street you are looking for is

not in the postcode area you have selectedin a previous window, you will not be able tofind the street at the street selection stage.


Country : To select the desired country.

City : To enter the desired city or postcode.

Street : To enter the desired street name.

House number : To enter the desired house number.

Junction : To select the desired intersection.

Last destinations : Open the My destinationsmenu ››› page 202.

Start : Start route guidance to the selected address.

Using the map● Select the destination on the map or enterit using GPS coordinates and confirm withOK .


Save : To save the selected point of interest in thedestination memory ››› page 202.

Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti-nation.

Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga-tion Settings > Route options.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected pointof interest.

200

Operating modes

After starting route guidance

Fig. 201 Route calculation.

After starting route guidance, the route to thefirst destination will be calculated.

The calculation will be performed in accord-ance with the data selected in the Routeoptions menu.

After starting route guidance, three alterna-tive routes will be suggested depending onthe selected setup ››› Fig. 201. These 3 routescorrespond to the selectable route options:Economical, Fast and Short.

Route criteria: Meaning

Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculatedby taking into consideration economic factors.

Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if itis necessary to make a deviation.

Route criteria: Meaning

Orange route: Shortest route to the destination,even if it results in longer travelling time. The routemay have unconventional sections such as secon-dary roads.

● Select the desired route by pressing it.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys-tem gives the first navigation announcement.Before turning, up to 3 navigation announce-ments will be heard.

● Press the adjustment knob ››› Fig. 173 7 tolisten to the last audible navigation instruc-tion.

A navigation announcement informs youwhen you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing youthat you have reached the “destination area”is given if the exact destination cannot bereached because it is located in a non-digi-tised area.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-ceive information about reported traffic con-gestion on the route. An additional navigationannouncement is given if the route is recalcu-lated due to traffic congestion.

During a navigation announcement, you canchange its volume using the button ››› Fig. 173 6 .

For other adjustments to the navigation rec-ommendations, select Navigation > Set-tings > Navigation announcementssettings.

Note● If you miss a turning during route guid-ance and are currently unable to turn back,keep on driving until the navigation systemoffers a new route.● The quality of the navigation recommen-dations given by the Infotainment systemdepends on the navigation data availableand any reported traffic problems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Routefunction button.

The Route function button is only displayedwith route guidance activated.


Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance.

Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a newstopover ››› page 200.

Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10km in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoidcongestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Routefunction button and then Cancel congestion . »

201

Infotainment System


Route details : View route information for current route.

My destinations (destination mem-ory)

The stored destinations can be selected fromthe My destinations menu.

● Press the My destinations. function button inthe main Navigation menu.● Select the desired function button.Store position , Routes , Destinations ,Last destinations or Home address .

Store position● By pressing the Store position function but-ton, the vehicle's current position is stored asa Flagged destination in the destinationmemory.● Mark the Flagged destination in thedestination memory.● Press the Store function button.

The name can be changed in the followinginput window. Press the function button tostore the destination.

RoutesIn the Route mode, you can define variousdestinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always thecurrent vehicle position determined by the In-fotainment system. The destination is theend point of a route. Stopover destinationsare driven to before the destination.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theMy Destinations. function button.● Press the Routes function button. Theroutes stored previously will appear.

If you have not stored any routes or want tocreate a new route, press the New route func-tion button and then follow the instructions asfor a new destination, before pressing Store .

Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol-lowing function buttons:


Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the Newroute or Edit route menu

Function button or message: function or meaning

Stopover.

Destination.

...Estimated time of arrival at destina-tion.

... Calculated distance to destination.

... Travelling time.

... Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the functionbuttons.

Delete destination.

To start guidance direct to the selec-ted destination. Destinations thatcome before the selected destinationare ignored.

To open the detailed view of the desti-nation in question.

Available function buttons.

New dest. To add a new destination to the tour.

Destina-tions

To add a new destination from Mydestinations to the tour.

Storing To store the created tour in the tourmemory.

Start To start route guidance.

Calculate To update calculated distance and es-timated arrival time.a)

202

Operating modes

Stop To stop route guidance to the activedestination.b)

To move a stopover or a destination toanother position on the list. Press anddrag to move the destination.

a) This function button is only displayed with routeguidance activated and when a destination has beenadded to the tour.b) This function button is only displayed with routeguidance activated.

Last destinationsView of destinations for which a route has al-ready been started.

My destinations● Press the Options function button and se-lect the desired function button.


Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-ually and from imported vCards ››› page 207, Im-porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that havea stored address (postal address).

Home addressOnly one address or position can be storedas the home address at any one time. The

stored home address can be edited or over-written.

If a home address has already been stored,route guidance will be started to the storedhome address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, anaddress can be assigned as the home ad-dress.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current posi-tion as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manual-ly.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Points of interest (POI)

Fig. 202 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the navigationdata memory are divided into different pointof interest categories. Each point of interestcategory is assigned a symbol for display onthe map.

If a database of points of interest has beenimported into the Infotainment system,››› page 207, Importing Personal POI thecategory Personal POI is also shown.

In the Map settings menu, the categories ofpoints of interest to display on the map canbe configured. Up to 10 categories of pointsof interest can be selected. »

203

Infotainment System

Selecting a point of interest on the map


1There are several points of interest in the area.Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-terest.

2The only point of interest in this zone. Press thesymbol to open the detailed view of the point ofinterest.

Quick POI searchIn the Navigation main menu, press the POIfunction button and the three main catego-ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the nameof the point of interest to be searched usingthe new destination keypad, or pressSearch nearby on the map ››› table on

page 205.

View

In the Navigation main menu, press the Viewfunction button.


2D Map display in two dimensions (con-ventional).


3D

Map display in three dimensions (bird'seye view).

Buildings are also displayed in threedimensions. The places of interest andwell-known buildings are shown in de-tail and in colour.

a) To display the destination on the map.

a) To display the route on the map.

Auto /Day / Night

To change between day and night for-mat.

Split screen Press to display the split screen››› page 204.

POI Display points of interest on the map.

a) This function button is only displayed with routeguidance activated.

Split screen

Fig. 203 Split screen displayed.

The split screen ››› Fig. 203 A may displayany of the information described below:

● Press on the name of the split screen to se-lect a display option.


Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-elling direction and indicates the current position ofthe vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them bringsup additional information

Most frequent routes a): Information on the user's mostfrequent routes.

204

Operating modes


Position : current vehicle position in coordinates andGPS status (satellite reception).

a) This function button is only shown when route guid-ance is not active or when predictive route guidanceis active.

Press the function button to close the splitscreen.

At any moment during navigation, pressinginside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-pear with the following functions:


Street name or coordinates : shows the details of thepoint selected on the map.

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI : name of the point of interest (when only oneappears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when youpress on the map on various POIs grouped to-gether).

Favourite : name of the favourite.

Home : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac-tive route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but onlyfor the area around the point selected on the map.


Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 204 Messages and function buttons onthe map display.

Function buttons and messages on themap display.To activate function buttons and , pressfunction button .


To select automatic scaling. If the func-tion is active, the symbol is displayed inblue.

Current altitude indicator.


View map scale. Turn the setup button ormove your fingers together/apart on thetouchscreen to change the scale of themap.

It can mute or repeat the last announce-ment, or can change the announcementvolume.

To change the orientation of the map(north-facing or direction of travel). Thisfunction is only available in 2D mode.

To centre the vehicle position on the map.

To centre the destination on the map. Thisfunction button is only displayed if eitherDisplay destination on map or Displayroute on the map is selected››› page 204.

Briefly zooms in on the map. After a fewseconds, it automatically returns to thelast selected scale.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data aredisplayed. Select Navigation > Settings >Map > Show road signs.

205

Infotainment System

Traffic reports and dynamic routeguidance to the destination (TRAF-FIC)

Fig. 205 Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receivestraffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-ground, provided a TMC traffic news stationcan be received at the current location. Thestation being listened to does not have to bethe traffic news station.

List of available traffic reports● Press the Infotainment button ››› Fig. 173 12 and then press the TRAFFICfunction button.

Dynamic route guidanceIn order for dynamic route guidance to func-tion, Dynamic route must be activated in theroute options.

If during route guidance a traffic report is re-ceived that affects the route being travelled,an alternative route will be searched for if theInfotainment system calculates that time canbe saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

: Slow traffic

: Traffic jam

: Accident

: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)

: Slippery road surface

: Danger

: Road works

: Strong wind

: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic congestion thatdoes not affect the route calculated is dis-played in grey.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 206 Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, thesystem detects and stores in the backgroundroutes that are frequently followed, withoutthem being active destination routes. Thisfunction has no navigation announcementsunless the user requires them, getting themby pressing the adjustment knob››› Fig. 173 7 .

● On the main screen of the Navigation menu,in the pop-up window, press theFrequent routes button. To display frequently

followed routes press the Show on map button››› Fig. 206.

206

Operating modes

Importing vCards (electronic busi-ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-ory● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainmentsystem ››› page 191.● Press the SETTINGS function button in themain Navigation menu.● In the Navigation settings menu, pressthe Import destinations function button.● Select the data carrier with the vCardssaved in the list.● Press Import all vCards from this folder .● Confirm the import notice with the OKfunction button.

The saved vCards will now be in the destina-tion memory ››› page 202 and may be usedfor navigation.

NoteOnly one address per vCard can be impor-ted. In the event any vCards have multipleaddresses, only the main address will beimported.

Importing Personal POI

Importing the Personal POI to a points ofinterest destination memory● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain-ment system ››› page 191.● Press the Infotainment button ››› Fig. 173 3 and then select Settings .● In the Settings menu, press theManage memory function button.● Press Update my POIs and then pressUpdate and Next to import the Personal

POIs.● Confirm the import notification with the OKfunction button.

The stored Personal POI are now in the pointsof interest destination memory ››› page 203and can be used for navigation purposes.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted inthe Navigation Settings > ManageStorage menu.

Navigation with images

Fig. 207 Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting routeguidanceBear in mind the requirements and formats ofthe compatible images.

● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed images or connect it to the Infotainmentsystem.● Press the Infotainment button ››› Fig. 173 12 and then select Images .● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 207 function but-ton and select the data storage device wherethe images are stored.● Select the desired image.● If the image displayed was taken using GPSlocalisation, the function button will appear.Press to start guidance to a destination.

207

Infotainment System

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the NavigationSettings menu, an additional pop-up win-dow opens when you start route guidance.

● Pressing the Demo mode function buttonstarts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti-nation you have entered.● If you press the Normal function button, a“real route guidance” starts.

Vehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehiclemenu

By pressing button / ››› Fig. 172 3 ,››› Fig. 173 9 of the infotainment system youwill access its main menu with the followingoptions:

● VIEW● MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radioor Media function)● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)● SETTINGS ››› page 34

With the function button View you can ac-cess the following information:

Instrument panelPress the Instrument Panel button to choosefrom the various display options and custom-ise the information that appears in the DigitalCockpit ››› page 104:

Automatic Display: default informationdepending on the selected DrivingMode.Classic Display: the entire lengths ofthe revolutions per minute and speed-ometer needles are shown.Views 1, 2, 3: customise the informationthat appears in the digital cockpit. Only2 of these items of information can bedisplayed at the same time, but the userchooses which to display, and in whatorder, by moving the finger verticallyover the dials. Depending on the version,the Views can be memorised by existingthe menu or keeping the View buttonpressed.

ConsumersBy pressing the Consumers button, informa-tion on the status of the vehicle's main con-

–

–

–

sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via aconsumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)1).

Driving dataThe onboard computer is equipped with 3memories that work automatically. In thesememories you can see the distance travelled,average speed, time passed, average con-sumption and autonomy of the vehicle.

Ecotrainer*If the corresponding equipment is available,the ECOTRAINER will provide information ondriving style. The information on driving styleis only evaluated and displayed when movingforward.

Vehicle statusPress the Vehicle status button to accessinformation on the Vehicle status mes-sages and Start-Stop system. The Vehiclestatus messages are displayed, in addition tobeing specified on the corresponding button.

1) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units arein kg/h.

208

Operating modes

Telephone

General information


The Telephone functions described belowcan be used through the Infotainment systemif there is a mobile telephone connected to itvia Bluetooth® ››› page 211.

In order for the mobile telephone to be ableto connect to the Infotainment system the tel-ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth®.

If there is no mobile telephone connected tothe Infotainment system, the telephone man-agement system will not be available.

The instructions shown on the screen for thetelephone menus will depend on the mobiletelephone used. There may be variations.

Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. Forfurther information on compatible Bluetooth®

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer orcheck on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues betweenyour mobile telephone and the Infotainmentsystem, restart your mobile by switching it offand on again.

WARNINGGeneral, mandatory, legal and country-specific instructions and laws for the use ofmobile phones inside the vehicle must al-ways be considered.

WARNINGSpeaking by telephone and using the mo-bile telephone management system whilstdriving can distract you from the road andcause an accident.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicleat all times (e.g. emergency services sirensand horns).● In areas of little or no coverage or, insome cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-pass, your call may be cut off and you maynot be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNINGIf a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-correctly secured in the vehicle, it couldmove around the passenger compartmentin the event of a sudden driving manoeuvreor emergency stop, resulting in injury.

● While the vehicle is in motion, always se-cure the mobile telephone properly outsidethe airbag deployment zone.

WARNINGMobile telephones may interfere with andalter the correct operation of pacemakersif they are carried directly over them.● Maintain a minimum distance of at least20 centimetres between the aerials of themobile telephone and the pacemaker.● Do not carry your switched-on mobiletelephone in your breast pocket directlyover the pacemaker.● If you suspect interference, switch off themobile telephone immediately.

CAUTIONHigh speeds, poor weather or road condi-tions and the quality of reception can allaffect the audio quality of a telephone con-versation in the vehicle.

Note● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● If you wish to connect a device to the tel-ephone management system via Blue-tooth® technology, consult the safety »

209

Infotainment System

warnings in its instruction manual. Only usecompatible Bluetooth® devices.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo-bile’s Bluetooth® function in places with a riskof explosion. In the majority of cases, theseplaces are signposted, but not always clearly››› in General information on page 209.They include, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquidgas (such as propane or butane).● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder.● all other places where the vehicle enginemust be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion! The mobile telephone canautomatically connect to the mobile tele-phone network again if it loses the Blue-

tooth® connection to the telephone man-agement system.

CAUTIONIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile telephones is prohibited,both the telephone and the telephonemanagement system must be switched off.The radiation produced by the mobile tele-phone when switched on may interfere withsensitive technical and medical equipment,possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam-age to the equipment.

Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele-phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-phone management system. In order to usethe telephone management system with amobile telephone with Bluetooth® technolo-gy, it is first necessary to pair them.

Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones detectand automatically connect when turning onthe ignition if a connection has been previ-ously established. For this to take place thetelephone must be switched on and its Blue-tooth® function activated, and there must be

no active Bluetooth® connection with otherdevices.

Bluetooth® connections are free.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth® SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles®

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-ephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®

profiles.

● Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect-ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag-er through the HFP the calls can be managedvia the Infotainment system.● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes iteasier to transmit audio to the infotainmentsystem with stereo quality. This function mayrequire connecting additional profiles formanaging and controlling audio playback.● Phone book access profile (PBAP):Serves to download phone book contactsfrom the mobile telephone to the Infotainmentsystem.● Message profile (MAP):1) Serves thedownload and synchronise short messages(SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain-ment system.

1) Not available for the Media System Touch/Col-our model.

210

Operating modes

NoteTo prevent them from being heard throughthe speakers, the button and mobile tele-phone alert tones must be disconnected.Where necessary, disconnect the headsetfrom the mobile telephone you wish to con-nect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobiletelephone to the Infotainment sys-tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone viathe Infotainment system, it is necessary topair both devices once.

For your safety, we recommend you make thelink when the vehicle is stationary. In somecountries it is not possible to perform the pair-ing with the vehicle running.

ConditionsYou must guarantee the following setup in themobile phone and the Infotainment system:

● The ignition must be switched on.● The Bluetooth® function of the mobile tel-ephone and the Infotainment system must beactive as well as visibility.● The keypad lock on the mobile telephonemust be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary toenter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone● Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth®

function is activated and visible.● Press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 5 , ››› Fig. 173 8

● Press the Find telephone function button andthen Results .

OR:● Press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 5 , ››› Fig. 173 8

● Press the SETTINGS function button.● Press the Select mobile phone function but-ton and then Results .

OR:● Press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 5 , ››› Fig. 173 8

● Press the SETTINGS function button.● Press the Bluetooth function button.● Press the Find devices function button andthen Results .

The name of the Bluetooth® function of yourInfotainment system will be displayed on the

main Telephone screen and you can edit thisname via the Bluetooth settings menu

The search process can take up to 1 minute.On the screen, the system will dynamicallyupdate the names of the Bluetooth® devicesfound.

As soon as the search is completed, thenames of the Bluetooth® devices found aredisplayed on-screen.

● Select the Bluetooth® device you want toconnect on the infotainment system. In cer-tain circumstances, it is possible that to finishthe connection between the two devices, youmust enter additional data in the mobile tele-phone and Infotainment system.● Use your mobile telephone to enter andconfirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-play of the infotainment system.● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requestsare received on the mobile telephone, makesure to reply to them.

OR:● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-play of the Infotainment system with thatshown on the mobile telephone. If theymatch, confirm on both devices.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. Thephone book, call list and SMS messages stor-ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once »

211

Infotainment System

the requests have been accepted in the mo-bile phone. The duration of the loading proc-ess depends on the amount of data stored onthe mobile telephone. After downloading, thedata will be available on the Infotainmentsystem.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-phonesYou can pair up to 20 mobile telephones tothe Infotainment system, but the number of si-multaneous connections varies:

● Media System Touch / Colour: a phoneconnected to the hands-free profile and thesame or a different device connected to theBluetooth® audio profile.● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-bile phones simultaneously connected to thehands-free profile and one of them is alsoconnected Bluetooth® audio profile.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,it automatically connects to the last connec-ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible toconnect to this mobile telephone, the tele-phone management system will try to auto-matically connect to the next mobile tele-phone on the list of paired devices.

The maximum range of the Bluetooth® con-nection is approx. 10 meters. The activeBluetooth® connection disconnects if this dis-tance is exceeded. The connection is auto-

matically re-established as soon as the de-vice is once again within Bluetooth® range.

WARNINGDo not perform the pairing and connectionprocess while driving. This may cause anaccident!

Note● It may be necessary to confirm the phonebook data and SMS transfer request on themobile telephone.● Check that there are no requests pend-ing acceptance in your mobile phone. Ifthere are, this could block some of thefunctions in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 209 Telephone main menu (view of the 8"screen).

Assign a user profileThe data from the phonebook, the call listsand the stored speed dial buttons are as-signed to a user profile and remain stored onthe telephone management system. This in-formation will be available every time the mo-bile telephone is connected to the telephonemanagement system.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-nutes for the data from the phonebook of thelinked mobile phone to be available in the In-fotainment system. The next time that themobile telephone is connected (e.g. on thenext journey) the phonebook is updated au-tomatically.

If any entries in the mobile phonebook havebeen modified while connected, a manualupdate of the phonebook data can be initi-ated from the User profile settingsmenu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones.If you wish to link/connect another mobilephone, the oldest user profile will automati-cally be replaced.

Telephone management system functionbuttons● Press the infotainment button / ››› Fig. 172 5 , ››› Fig. 173 8 to open the Tele-phone main menu.

212

Operating modes


1

Name of connected mobile tele-phone. Press the icon to the left toconnect or pair with another mobiletelephone.

2Speed dial buttons, to which tele-phone numbers from the phone-book may be assigned respectively.

3

To change to another telephoneconnected to the hands-free profile.This button will only be visible whenthere are two telephones connectedas hands-free. The active user pro-file corresponds to the telephoneappearing on the screen.

DIAL NUM-BER

To open the number pad and enter atelephone number ››› page 213.

CONTACTS To open the phonebook of the con-nected mobile telephone.

SMSa) To open the menu for SMS messag-es.

CALLS To open call lists of the connectedmobile telephone ››› page 214.

SETTINGS To open the Telephone set-tings menu.


Display and symbols of the tele-phone management system

Fig. 210 Active call.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 210

AName of the mobile network operator (pro-vider) to which the mobile telephone is con-nected.

B

View of stored telephone number or name. Ifthe name stored in the phonebook has anassigned photo, it can be displayed: selectTelephone > Settings > Userprofile > Show pictures forcontacts*.

Press to accept a call.

Press to end a call.

OR: Press to reject an incoming call.

Press to mute or to reactivate the ring toneduring an incoming call.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 210

Press to mute the microphone during an ac-tive call and to reactivate it.

This button keeps the call active. While thecall is on hold the listener will not hear theconversation. To reactivate it, press the callaccept button . To reject it, press the rejectbutton .

Press to add a participant to the active call.

Charge status of a mobile telephone con-nected via “Hands-free profile” (HFP) Blue-tooth®.

Strength of coverage signal received by themobile telephone.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 211 Enter telephone number menu. »

213

Infotainment System

Open the Enter telephone number menuPress the DIAL NUMBER function button fromthe PHONE main menu.

Possible functions

Enter telephonenumber

Entering a phone number withthe keypad.

Press the function button tomake a call.

Select a con-tact from thelist

Enter the first letters of the con-tact to find using the keypad.The available entries appear inthe phonebook.

Select the desired contact fromthe phonebook to make the call.

Enter the coun-try code

To enter a country code, insteadof the first two digits (interna-tional access code e.g. “00”)you can enter the character “+”.

Press the function button 0 forapprox. 2 seconds to add the +.

Breakdownservice call

Press the function button to ob-tain help in the event of break-down. For this the network ofSEAT dealerships is available toyou with their Mobility Service.

Information call

Press the function button to ob-tain information on the SEATbrand and the additional serv-ices contracted related to trafficand travel.

Possible functions

Call mailbox

Press the Voice mail functionbutton to make the call.

OR: Press the function buttonfor about 2 seconds to make acall.

If the number for the mailbox hasnot yet been stored, enter it andconfirm with OK .

Note● Breakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.● The Roadside Assistance and Informationservices might not work properly, for exam-ple, if the vehicle and the operator of theconnected mobile telephone are in differ-ent countries. If you are not able to usethese services contact an authorised SEATworkshop.

Call Menu (call lists)

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed

and unanswered calls.

Display: Meaning

Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled

on the mobile telephone and on the Infotain-ment system telephone management system.

Received calls : Indicates the numbers of thecalls received on the mobile telephone and onthe Infotainment system telephone manage-ment system.

NoteThe availability of the call lists will dependon the mobile phone used.

Multimedia

USB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 212 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

214

Operating modes

Depending on the special characteristics andthe country, the vehicle may have aUSB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 212.

The operating description is located in››› page 191.

Connectivity Box* / WirelessCharger*


Fig. 214 Centre console: Connectivity Box

The Connectivity Box includes different func-tions that will help to use your mobile device.

They are the “Wireless Charger” and the“Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

The Wireless Charger only features the“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with-out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

● Place your mobile device with Qi technolo-gy1 ) in the middle of the pad with the screenfacing up ››› Fig. 214.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device uses Qi technol-ogy, please check your mobile phone's usermanual or visit the SEAT website.

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you toreduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoybetter reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended thatyou pair the radio and the mobile device us-ing Bluetooth® and place the mobile phoneon the Connectivity Box pad, so as to havebetter reception without having to handle themobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle'sexternal aerial:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 214.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically beready to make use of the external aerial. »

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

215

Infotainment System

WARNINGThe mobile phone may heat up due to thewireless charging. Think about the temper-ature of your device before you pick it up,and take care when removing it.

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiwireless inductive charging interfacestandard for proper operation.● If your mobile phone has a cover or a pro-tective casing, this may affect the Connec-tivity Box functions.● There must be no metallic objects be-tween the pad and the mobile device thatmight affect the wireless charging or theconnection with the external aerial.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mo-bile phone is correctly placed on the pad.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.● No improvement in the transmission qual-ity can be guaranteed if there is more thanone mobile phone on the pad.● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless chargingof your device.

● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, the charging will beperformed through the medium specifiedby each mobile device manufacturer.

216

Start and driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping theengine

Ignition key positions

Fig. 215 Ignition key positions.


Ignition switched off, steering lockIn this position ››› Fig. 215 1 the ignition andthe engine are off and the steering may belocked.

For the Steering lock to operate without theignition key, turn the steering wheel until it

locks with an audible sound. You should al-ways lock the steering wheel when you leaveyour vehicle. This will help prevent vehicletheft ››› .

Switching the ignition or the glow plugsystem onTurn the ignition key to this position and re-lease it 2 . If the key cannot be turned or it isdifficult to turn from position 1 to position 2 ,move the steering wheel from one side to theother; this will release it.

StartingThe engine is started when the key is in thisposition 3 . Electrical devices with high pow-er consumption are switched off temporarilyat the same time.

Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig-nition key must be turned to position 1 . Therepetitive start prevention lock of the igni-tion prevents possible damage to the startermotor if the engine is already running.

WARNING● The ignition key must NOT be removedfrom the lock until the vehicle comes to astandstill. Otherwise, the steering could beimmediately blocked- Risk of accident!● Always remove the key from the ignitionwhen leaving the vehicle, even if only for ashort period. This is especially important if

children or disabled people are left alonein the vehicle. They could accidentallystart the engine or work electrical equip-ment such as the electric windows, result-ing in an accident.● Unsupervised use of the key could startthe engine or any electrical system, suchas the electric windows. This could result inserious injury.

CAUTIONThe starter motor will only work when theengine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ).

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine SEAT key with its correct code.

– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-oughly and hold it in this position for thestarter to turn the engine on.

– Turn the ignition key to the starting position››› Fig. 215 3 .

– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts; the starter motor must not runon with the engine.

After starting a very hot engine, you mayneed to slightly press down the accelerator. »

217

Driving

When starting a cold engine, it may be a littlenoisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-pensators. This is quite normal, and no causefor concern.

If the engine does not start immediately,switch the starter off after 10 seconds and tryagain after half a minute. If the engine stilldoes not start, the fuel pump fuse should bechecked ››› page 91, Fuses.

WARNING● Never start or run the engine in unventila-ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gasescontain carbon monoxide, an odourlessand colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatalaccidents. Carbon monoxide can causeloss of consciousness and result in death.● Never leave the vehicle unattended if theengine is running.● Never use “cold start sprays”, they couldexplode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine. Riskof engine damage.● The vehicle should not be pushed or tow-ed more than 50 metres to start the engine.

Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con-verter and damage it.● Before attempting to push-start or tow avehicle in order to start it, you should firsttry to start it using the battery of anothervehicle. Please observe and follow thenotes on the ››› page 59, How to jumpstart.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps theengine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

NoteNatural gas engines (CNG) always start upwith petrol, as a certain operating temper-ature is required for running with gas. Oncethe required operating temperature isreached, the engine will automaticallyswitch to natural gas mode.

Starting diesel engines


– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-

oughly and hold it in this position for thestarter to turn the engine on.

– Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 2152 . The warning lamp will light for en-

gine pre-heating.

– When the lamp turns off, turn the ignitionkey to position 3 to start the engine. Do notpress the accelerator.

– Release the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts. The starter motor should notturn at the same time.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a littlenoisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-pensators. This is quite normal, and no causefor concern.

If there are problems starting the engine, seethe ››› page 59.

Glow plug system for diesel enginesTo avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-tery, do not use any other major electricalequipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plugwarning lamp goes out.

218

Start and driving

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tankhas run dryIf the fuel tank has been completely run dry, itmay take longer than normal (up to one mi-nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.This is because the fuel system must elimi-nate air first.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Start-ing petrol engines on page 218.

CAUTION● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine. Riskof engine damage.● The vehicle should not be pushed or tow-ed more than 50 metres to start the engine.Unburnt fuel could enter the particulate fil-ter and damage it.● Before attempting to push-start or tow avehicle in order to start it, you should firsttry to start it using the battery of anothervehicle. Please observe and follow thenotes on the ››› page 59, How to jumpstart.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Youshould drive off as soon as you start the en-gine. This helps the engine reach operatingtemperature faster and reduces emissions.

“SAFE” electronic immobiliser1)

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivatesthe electronic immobiliser automaticallywhen the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock.


If the following message* is shown on the in-strument panel display: SAFE, the vehiclecannot be started.

The engine can, however, be started if theappropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.

NoteA perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Switching off the engine

Switching off the engine– Stop the vehicle.

– Turn the ignition key to position››› Fig. 215 1 .

Engaging the steering wheel lockIn vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-tion key can only be removed when the se-lector lever is in position P2).

– Remove the ignition key in position››› Fig. 215 1 ››› .

– Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-gage.

Possible vehicle theft is prevented with thesteering lock engaged.

After switching the engine off, the radiator fanmay run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also pos-sible that the fan turns itself on once more ifthe coolant temperature increases due to the »

1) Available depending on the market2) Depending upon country.

219

Driving

heat accumulated in the engine compart-ment or due to its prolonged exposure to so-lar radiation.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is completely stationary.● The brake servo works only when the en-gine is running. With the engine switchedoff, more strength is needed to brake. Asnormal brake operation cannot be per-formed, risk of accidents and serious injurymay exist.● The steering lock can be immediatelyblocked once the key is removed from theignition. The vehicle cannot be steered.Risk of accident.● Power-assisted steering does not workwhen the engine is off, and more strength isneeded to turn the wheel.● If the key is removed from the ignitionlock the steering lock could be engagedand vehicle steering would not work.

CAUTION● When the engine has been running undera heavy load for a long period, heat canaccumulate in the engine compartmentand cause engine damage. For this reason,idle the engine for approximately 2 minutesbefore switching it off.● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, the

ignition remains switched on. Make surethat the ignition is switched off before leav-ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery coulddischarge.

Starter button*

Fig. 216 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: start button.

Fig. 217 On the right of the steering column:emergency start.

The vehicle engine can be started with astarter button (Press & Drive). To do so, theremust be a valid key inside the vehicle in thearea of the front or rear seats.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manuallyBriefly push the starter button without touch-ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› .

For vehicles with both manual and automatictransmission, the starter button textSTART ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching theignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-offIf the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on,the ignition is not switched off automatically.The ignition is switched off automatically bypressing the lock button on the remote con-trol or manually by pressing the sensor sur-face on the door lever ››› Fig. 139

Emergency starting functionIf no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dash

220

Start and driving

panel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the battery of the vehicle key button isvery low or flat:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trimof the steering column ››› Fig. 217, as close aspossible to the Kessy logo.● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Emergency disconnectionIf the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› .● The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart featureIf no valid key is detected inside the vehicleafter the engine stops, you will only have 5seconds to restart it. A warning will display onthe dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key inside thevehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-tery has enough charge). If the driver locksthe vehicle or manually turns off the light, theside light goes out.

WARNINGAny accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● When switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau-thorised person could lock the vehicle,start the engine or connect the ignition

and, in this way, operate electronic equip-ment (e.g. the windows).

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-connect the ignition manually and, if ap-propriate, take into account the instruc-tions on the screen of the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the ignition on, the vehicle batterymight be discharged and it might not bepossible to start the engine.● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay inthe engine starting if it requires preheating.● If during the STOP phase you press theSTART ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”,the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

221

Driving

Starting the engine3 Applies to vehicles with start button

Step Starting the engine with the start-er button ››› page 220.

1.

Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5is performed.In vehicles with a manual gearbox:press and hold the clutch down until theengine starts.

2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in position P or N.

3.

Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 216without pressing the accelerator. For theengine to start there must be a valid key inthe vehicle.After starting the engine, the light of theSTART ENGINE STOP button changes to a

fixed light indicating that the engine hasstarted.

4.If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor approx. 1 minute before trying again. Ifnecessary, carry out an emergency start››› page 220.

5. Disconnect the hand brake when you areabout to start driving ››› page 224.

WARNINGNever leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, especially if a gear or gear rangeis engaged. The vehicle could then sudden-ly move or something strange could hap-

pen that would cause damage, fire or seri-ous injury.

WARNINGCold start sprays could explode or cause asudden increase in the engine speed.● Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to start the engine whiledriving or if you restart it immediately afterswitching it off.● If the engine is cold, avoid high enginespeeds, pushing the engine too hard andrapid acceleration.● Do not start the engine by pushing thevehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en-ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note● Do not wait until the engine warms upwith the vehicle stationary; if you havegood visibility through the windows, startdriving immediately. This helps the enginereach operating temperature faster and re-duces emissions.● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.

● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.● When the outside temperature is below+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine3 Applies to vehicles with start button

Step Switch off the engine with thestarter button ››› page 220.

1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .

2. Press and hold the brake pedal until thestep 4 is performed.

3. If you are driving an automatic vehicle,place the selector lever in position P.

4. Apply the handbrake ››› page 224.

5.

Briefly press the start-up button››› Fig. 216. The START ENGINE STOP buttonblinks again. If the engine fails to switchoff, perform an emergency disconnect››› page 221.

6. If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

222

Start and driving

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.

CAUTIONIf the engine is made to work hard for a longtime, it may overheat after being switchedoff. To prevent damage to the engine be-fore switching it off, leave it idle for approx.2 minutes in neutral.

NoteAfter switching off the engine, the coolingfan may continue to operate in the enginecompartment for a few more minutes, evenwith the ignition off. The radiator fan is au-tomatically switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle ignitionsystem.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by openingthe doors with the remote control, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at-

tention to the relevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light ofthe START ENGINE STOP button flashes. Withthe engine switched off, after a few seconds,the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashingand goes out.

With the engine running, theSTART ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The timethat lapses between the moment the userstarts the engine with the START ENGINE STOPbutton and the lighting changes from flashingto fixed will depend on specific engine sizecharacteristics. Upon switching the ignitionoff with the START ENGINE STOP button, it startsflashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but-

ton stays on, since, even though the engine isoff, the Start-Stop system is active.● When the engine cannot be stated againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 248, andneeds to be started manually, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate

this fact.

Braking and parking

Braking capacity and braking dis-tance

The efficiency of the brakes depends directlyon the brake pad wear. This wear depends toa great extent on the conditions under whichthe vehicle is operated and the way the vehi-cle is driven. If you often drive in town, driveshort distances or have a sporty driving style,we recommend that you have the thicknessof your brake pads checked by technicalservices more frequently than recommendedin the Maintenance Programme.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavyrainfall or even after washing the car, the ef-fect of the brakes is reduced as the brakediscs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in thiscase, press the brake pedal several times un-til the brakes are “dry”. »

223

Driving

WARNINGLonger braking distances and faults in thebrake system increase the risk of acci-dents.● New brake pads must be run in and do nothave the correct friction during the first200 km (124 miles). This reduced brakingcapacity may be compensated for bypressing on the brake pedal a little harder,which also applies when the brake padshave to be changed further on.● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you aredriving on roads which have been salted,braking power may be lower than normal.● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessivelyused, they will overheat. Before drivingdown a long steep slope, it is advisable toreduce speed and change down into a low-er gear or range (depending on the type oftransmission). Thus, make use of enginebraking and relieve the brakes.● Never let the brakes “drag” by applyinglight pressure. Continuous braking willcause the brakes to overheat and the brak-ing distance will increase. Apply and thenrelease the brakes alternately.● Never let the vehicle run with the engineswitched off. The braking distance is in-creased considerably when the brake ser-vo is not active.● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and issubjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles

can form in the brake system. This reducesthe efficiency of the brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please observe the relevantinstructions ››› page 307, Technical modifi-cations.● If a brake system circuit fails, the brakingdistance will be increased considerably.Contact a specialised workshop immedi-ately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 321 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Parking brake engaged ››› page 224.The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not go outor if it lights up when driving, the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir is too low so there is arisk of an accident ››› page 321, Brake fluid.Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob-tain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. This could cause therear wheels to lock quickly when you brake.This could cause the rear to break away.Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seektechnical assistance.

Handbrake

Fig. 218 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly toprevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling

224

Start and driving

away. Always apply the handbrake when youleave your vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly

››› Fig. 218.

Releasing the handbrake– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 218 and guide the handbrake leverdown fully ››› .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, sothere is less risk of driving off with it still en-gaged ››› .

WARNING● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-cle when it is in motion. The braking dis-tance is considerably longer, becausebraking is only applied to the rear wheels.Risk of accident!● If the handbrake is only partially re-leased, this will cause the rear brakes tooverheat, which can impair the function ofthe brake system and could lead to an ac-cident. This also causes premature wear onthe rear brake pads.

CAUTIONAlways apply the handbrake before youleave the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,place the gear lever in position P.

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap-plied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

– Apply the handbrake.

– Put it in 1st gear.

– Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.

– Always take you keys with you when youleave the vehicle ››› .

Additional notes on parking the vehicle ongradients:Turn the steering wheel so that the vehiclerolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turnthe front wheels so that they point towardsthe kerb.● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turnthe front wheels so that they point away fromthe kerb.

● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying thehandbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING● Take measures to reduce the risk of injurywhen you leave your vehicle unattended.● Never park where the hot exhaust systemcould ignite inflammable materials, such asdry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.● Never allow vehicle occupants to remainin the vehicle when it is locked. They wouldbe unable to open the vehicle from the in-side, and could become trapped in the ve-hicle in an emergency. In the event of anemergency, locked doors will delay assis-tance to vehicle occupants.● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-ample, by releasing the handbrake or thegearbox lever.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

225

Driving

Braking and stability sys-tems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys-tem.As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, theESC light will also come on if a fault should occur inthe ABS.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys-tem.

Flashes

ASR working.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode.

It lights up ››› page 229

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

This Electronic Stability System reduces therisk of skidding and improves the vehicle'sstability and ability to hold the road.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) con-tains the electronic differential lock (EDL) andthe traction control system (ASR). The ESCworks together with the ABS. Both controllamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systemsare faulty. It also includes emergency brakingassistance (HBA).

The ESC system is started automaticallywhen the engine is started.

The ESC system is always active and cannotbe switched off. With the Easy Connect sys-tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASRor else select Sport mode.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spinis desirable ››› page 227.

For example:

● When driving with snow chains.● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-faces.

● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back-wards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back onwhen you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-ing the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angleand road speed to calculate the changes ofdirection desired by the driver, and constant-ly compares them with the actual behaviourof the vehicle. When irregularities occur, forexample, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESCbrakes the appropriate wheel automatically.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bringthe vehicle back to a stable condition. If thevehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end slidesout), the system will act on the front wheel onthe outside of the turn.

Control lampThere are two control lamps for the electronicstability control. The lamp provides infor-mation concerning function and discon-nection status.

If the ESC control lamp lights up and stayson after the engine is started, this may meanthat the control system has temporarilyswitched off the ESC. In this case the ESCcan be reactivated by switching the ignition

226

Start and driving

off and then on again. If the control lampgoes out, this means the system is fully func-tional.

WARNING● Do not forget that the electronic stabilitycontrol ESC cannot defy the laws of phys-ics. Bear this in mind, particularly on slip-pery and wet roads and when towing atrailer.● Always adapt your driving style to suitthe condition of the roads and the trafficsituation. The greater safety provided bythe ESC should not encourage you to runany risks.

CAUTION● To ensure that the ESC works correctly,all four wheels must be fitted with the sametyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.

Traction control system (ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driv-en wheels from spinning when the vehicle isaccelerating.

Description and operation of the tractioncontrol system during acceleration (ASR)The ASR system intervenes by reducing en-gine power and preventing the driven wheelsfrom slipping during acceleration.

TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerateand climb a gradient in slippery conditionswhere this may otherwise be difficult or evenimpossible.

The ASR automatically switches on when theengine is started. If necessary, it could beswitched on or off using the Easy Connectsystem*.

When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lightsup . The ASR should normally be left on. On-ly in exceptional cases can it be disconnec-ted, i.e. when you want the wheels to slide;this done through the Easy Connect system,by means of the / button and the func-tion button SETTINGS> ESC system, for ex-ample:

● With compact temporary spare wheel.● When using the snow chains.● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-rain.

● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free itby “rocking it”.

The ASR should be switched on again assoon as possible.

Control lampThere are three control lamps for the tractioncontrol system: (for vehicles equipped withM-ABS), (for vehicles equipped with ESC)and .

If the system is deactivated or if it has anyfault, the warning lamp or will remain lit.The warning lamp will also light up if a faultshould occur in the ABS because the ASR op-erates in conjunction with the ABS. For furtherinformation, see ››› page 228.

WARNING● Remember that not even the ASR can de-fy the laws of physics. Bear this in mind,particularly on slippery and wet roads andwhen towing a trailer.● Always adapt your driving style to suitthe condition of the roads and the trafficsituation. The greater safety provided bythe ASR should not encourage you to runany risks.

CAUTION● To ensure that the ASR works correctly,identical tyres should be fitted on all fourwheels. Any differences in the rolling radius »

227

Driving

of the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS and ASR.

Connecting/disconnecting ESCand ASR*

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR and ESC function should only beswitched off in situations in which traction isinsufficient, among others:

● When driving in deep snow or on surfacesthat are not very firm.● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR and ESC function backon.

Depending on finishes and versions, it is pos-sible either to disconnect only the ASR or elseactivate ESC Sport mode.

ESC in “Sport” modeSport mode can be connected via the EasyConnect ››› page 34 system menu. TheESC and the traction control system (ASR)have only a limited ability to stabilise the ve-hicle.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles witha driver information system*, the driver will beshown the electronic stability control(ESC) option: sport. Warning! Limitedstability.

Disable ESC “Sport” modeThrough the Easy Connect system menu››› page 34. The warning lamp willswitch off. For vehicles with a driver informa-tion system*, the driver will be shown theelectronic stability control (ESC) op-tion: on.

Disable ASRThe Easy Connect system menu is used toswitch off the ASR ››› page 34. The trac-tion control system will be disabled.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles witha driver information system* the driver will beinformed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASRThe Easy Connect system menu››› page 34 is used to switch on the ASR.The traction control system will be enabled.

The control lamp switches off. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that ASR is enabled.

● Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func-tion in the Easy Connect system using the / button and the SETTINGS > ESCSystem function buttons.

WARNINGYou should switch on the ESC Sport modeonly if the traffic conditions and your driv-ing ability allow you to do so safely: risk ofskidding!● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.

NoteIf the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’sSport mode is selected, cruise control* willbe switched off.

228

Start and driving

Electronic differential lock (EDS)*

The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC)*.

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-tions where this may otherwise be difficult oreven impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speedof the driven wheels.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h(50 mph), it is able to balance out differencesin the speed of the driven wheels of approxi-mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partiallyslippery road surface. It does this by brakingthe wheel which has lost traction and distrib-uting more driving force to the other drivenwheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the brakingwheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.The vehicle will continue to function normallywithout EDL. For this reason, the driver is notinformed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automaticallywhen the brake has cooled down.

Control lampA malfunction in the EDL is indicated by theESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to aspecialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING● When accelerating on a slippery surface,for example on ice and snow, press the ac-celerator carefully. Despite EDL, the drivenwheels may start to spin. This could impairthe vehicle's stability.● Always adapt your driving style to suitroad conditions and the traffic situation. Donot let the extra safety afforded by EDLtempt you into taking any risks when driv-ing, this can cause accidents.

CAUTIONModifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-gine, the brake system, running gear or anycomponents affecting the wheels andtyres) could affect the efficiency of the EDL››› page 307.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake (ABS) system preventsthe wheels from locking during braking and isan important part of the vehicle's active safe-ty system.

How the ABS worksIf one of the wheels turns too slowly in relationto the vehicle's speed, and is close to locking,the system will reduce the braking pressure tothis wheel. The driver is made aware of thiscontrol process by a pulsating of the brakepedal and audible noise. This is a deliberatewarning to the driver that one or more of thewheels is tending to lock and the ABS controlfunction has intervened. In this situation it isimportant to keep the brake pedal fully de-pressed so the ABS can regulate the brakeapplication. Do not “pump”.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,the best possible control is retained as thewheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guaranteeshorter braking distances in all conditions.Braking distance could even be further if youbrake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip-pery surface.

The ABS system is faulty if:● The control lamp does not light up whenthe ignition is switched on.● The control lamp does not go out again af-ter a few seconds.● The control lamp lights up when the vehicleis moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normalway, without the ABS function. Take the »

229

Driving

vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible.

If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and thetyre pressure control lamp will also light up.

Brake system faultIf the ABS warning lamp lights up togetherwith the brake warning lamp , there is afault in the ABS function and in the brake sys-tem ››› .

WARNING● The anti-lock brake system cannot defythe laws of physics. Slippery and wet roadsare dangerous even with ABS! If you noticethat the ABS is working (to counteractlocked wheels under braking), you shouldreduce speed immediately to suit the roadand traffic conditions. Do not let the extrasafety features tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving.● The effectiveness of ABS is also deter-mined by the tyres fitted ››› page 325.● If the running gear or brake system ismodified, the effectiveness of the ABScould be severely limited.

WARNING● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 315, Working inthe engine compartment.

● If the brake system warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warn-ing lamp , stop the vehicle immediatelyand check the brake fluid level in the reser-voir ››› page 321, Brake fluid. If the brakefluid level has dropped below the “MIN”mark you must not drive on. Risk of acci-dent. Obtain technical assistance.● If the brake fluid level is correct, the faultin the brake system may have been causedby a failure of the ABS system. This couldcause the rear wheels to lock quickly whenyou brake. This could cause the rear tobreak away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehi-cle and seek technical assistance.

Hydraulic Brake Assist*

The Hydraulic Brake Assist is only included invehicles with ESC.

In an emergency, most drivers brake in time,but not with maximum force. This results inunnecessarily long braking distances.

This is when the brake assist system comesinto action. When pressing the brake pedalrapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-gency. It very quickly builds up the full brakepressure so that the ABS can be activatedmore quickly and efficiently, thus reducingbraking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-al, since the brake assist system switches offautomatically as soon as you release thebrake.

Automatic hazard warning lights activa-tionThe brake lights flash automatically to indi-cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or inan emergency situation. If the emergencybraking continues until the vehicle comes to astandstill, the hazard “warning” lights willthen come on and the brake lights will remainon permanently from that moment. Thewarning lights will automatically switch offwhen the vehicle begins to move again orwhen the "warning" light button is pressed.

WARNING● The risk of accident is higher if you drivetoo fast, if you do not keep your distancefrom the vehicle in front, and when the roadsurface is slippery or wet. The increasedaccident risk cannot be reduced by thebrake assist system.● The brake assist system cannot defy thelaws of physics. Slippery and wet roads aredangerous even with the brake assist sys-tem! Therefore, it is essential that you ad-just your speed to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-tures tempt you into taking any risks whendriving.

230

Start and driving

Electronic torque management(XDS)*

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turnat a higher speed than the inner wheel. In thisway, the wheel that is turning faster (outerwheel) receives less drive torque than the in-ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit-uations the torque delivered to the innerwheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin.On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv-ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit.This causes an overall loss of lateral grip onthe front axle, resulting in understeer or“lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct thiseffect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the driver's de-sired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination withthe ESC and is always active, even when ASRtraction control is disconnected or the ESC isin Sport mode.

Multi-collision Brake*

In an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk of

skidding during the accident, which couldlead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. dueto a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being tow-ed, you will have to press the brake pedal

considerably harder to make up for the lackof servo assistance.

WARNINGThe braking distance can also be affectedby external factors.● Never let the vehicle coast with the en-gine switched off. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.● If the brake servo is not working, for ex-ample when the vehicle is being towed, youwill have to press the brake pedal consid-erably harder than normal.

Hill driving assistant*


This function is only included in vehicles withESC.

The hill driving assistant helps the driver tomove off and upward on a hill when the vehi-cle is stationary. »

231

Driving

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-proximately two seconds after the drivertakes his foot off the brake pedal to preventthe vehicle from lurching backward when it isstarted. During these 2 seconds, the driverhas enough time to release the clutch pedaland accelerate without the vehicle movingand without having to use the handbrake,making start-up easier, more comfortableand safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

● being on a ramp or hill/slope,● driver door closed,● vehicle completely stationary,● engine running and foot on the brake,● besides having a gear engaged or being inneutral for manual gear change and with theselector lever at position S, D or R for an au-tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up-hill.

WARNING● If you do not start the vehicle immediate-ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may start to roll back undercertain conditions. Depress the brake ped-al or use the hand brake immediately.● If the engine stalls, depress the brakepedal or use the hand brake immediately.

● When following a line of traffic uphill, ifyou want to prevent the vehicle from rollingback accidentally when starting off, holdthe brake pedal down for a few secondsbefore starting off.

NoteThe Official Service or a specialist work-shop can tell you if your vehicle is equip-ped with this system.

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox


Certain versions of the model may include a6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram isshown on the gearbox lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged whenthe car is stationary. When the engine is run-ning and before engaging this gear, waitabout 6 seconds with the clutch presseddown thoroughly in order to protect the gear-box.

The reverse lights switch on when the reversegear is selected and the ignition is on.

WARNING● When the engine is running, the vehiclewill start to move as soon as a gear is en-gaged and the clutch released.● Never select the reverse gear when thevehicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure of your handcould cause premature wear on the selec-tor forks in the gearbox.● When changing gear, you should alwaysdepress the clutch fully to avoid unneces-sary wear and damage.● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehi-cle on a hill. This causes premature wearand damage to the clutch.● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-al; although the pressure may seem insig-nificant, it can cause the premature wear ofthe clutch plate. Use the foot rest when youdo not need to change gear.

232

Start and driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually if desired››› page 236, Engaging gears with the tip-tronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake pedal is not engaged.To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The interlock button on the selector lever is notpressed.Movement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the se-lector lever lock.

Selector lever positions


The selector lever position engaged is high-lighted on the display in the instrument clus-ter. With the selector lever in the manualgearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engagedgear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lockWhen the selector lever is in this position, thedriven wheels are locked mechanically. Theparking lock must be engaged only when thevehicle is stationary ››› .

The interlock button (the button on the selec-tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-multaneously the brake pedal must be de-pressed before moving the selector lever ei-ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› .

To move the selector lever to position R, theinterlock button must be pressed in and at thesame time the brake pedal must be de-pressed. The reverse lights come on when theselector lever is in the R position with the igni-tion on.

N – Neutral (idling)With the selector lever in this position, thegear is in neutral.

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) positionThe selector lever in the D/S position enablesthe gears to be controlled in normal mode(D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S),move the selector lever backwards. Movingthe lever again will select normal mode (D).The selected driving mode is shown on the in-strument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati-cally selects the best gear ratio. This de-pends on the engine load, the road speedand the dynamic gear control programme(DCP). »

233

Driving

In certain circumstances (i.e. traffic hold-ups,short stops, etc.) and to improve comfort, thevehicle can start up in the D2 gear ratio1).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sportydriving style. This setting makes use of the en-gine's maximum power output. When accel-erating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selectorlever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)››› .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv-ing in mountains) it can be advantageous toswitch temporarily to tiptronic mode››› page 236, in order to manually selectgear ratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING● Take care not to accidentally press theaccelerator pedal when the vehicle is stop-ped. The vehicle could otherwise startmoving immediately (in some cases even ifthe parking brake is engaged) resulting inthe risk of an accident.● Never move the selector lever to R or Pwhen driving. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.● With selector lever in any position (ex-cept P) the vehicle must always be heldwith the foot brake when the engine is run-

ning. This is because an automatic gearboxstill transmits power even at idling speed,and the vehicle tends to “creep”. The ac-celerator pedal must on no account bepressed inadvertently when a gear is en-gaged with the vehicle stationary. The ve-hicle could otherwise start moving immedi-ately (in some cases even if the parkingbrake is engaged) resulting in the risk of anaccident.● While you are selecting a gear and thevehicle is stopped with the engine running,do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. If you have to leave your vehiclewhile the engine is running, you must applythe handbrake and engage the parkinglock (P).● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrakeand put the selector lever in position P be-fore opening the bonnet and working on thevehicle with the engine running. Please al-ways observe the important safety warn-ings ››› page 315, Working in the enginecompartment.

Note● If the selector lever is moved accidental-ly to N when driving, release the accelera-

tor and let the engine speed drop to idlingbefore selecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply to the selectorlever be interrupted in position P, the selec-tor lever will be locked. If this should hap-pen the manual release can be used››› page 40.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 220 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears frombeing engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

– Switch the ignition on.

1) Valid for the 1.6 MPI 81 kW automatic engine.234

Start and driving

– Press the brake pedal and, at the sametime, hold the lock button in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 220.

Automatic selector lever lockWith the ignition switched on, the selectorlever is locked in the positions P and N. Thebrake pedal must be pressed to release thelever while pressing the release button if theselector lever is in the position P. As a remind-er for the driver, with the lever in positions P orN the following message will be shown on thedisplay:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) thelever lock is automatically deactivated in po-sition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if theselector lever is moved quickly through posi-tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). Thismakes it possible, for instance, to rock the ve-hicle “backwards and forwards” if it is stuck.The selector lever lock engages automatical-ly if the brake pedal is not depressed and thelever is in position N for more than about twoseconds.

Interlock buttonThe interlock button on the selector leverhandle prevents the driver from inadvertentlyengaging certain gears. Press the button in todisengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition keyOnce the ignition has been turned off, the keymay be removed only if the gear selector is inposition P. While the key is not in the ignition,the selector lever is locked in position P.

Note● If the selector lever lock does not en-gage, there is a fault. The transmission is in-terrupted to prevent the vehicle from acci-dentally moving. Follow the procedure be-low in order for the selector lever lock toengage again:– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the selector lever toposition P or N and subsequently en-gage a gear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-ceed to the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engag-ed. Press the brake pedal and engagethe gear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

235

Driving

Engaging gears with the tiptronicmode*

Fig. 221 Centre console: changing gear withtiptronic

Fig. 222 Steering wheel: automatic gearboxlevers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selectorleverIt is possible to change to tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the selec-tor lever from position D/S to the right. Assoon as the change is made the selectorlevel will be shown in the position M on theinstrument panel display (for example M4means that the fourth gear is engaged).

– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 221.

– Move the selector lever backwards – toselect a lower gear.

– To exit the Triptonic mode, move the selec-tor lever to the left.

Changing gear manually with the gear-shift paddles*The gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the position D/S or M.

– Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 222.

– Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.

– To exit the Triptonic mode, pull the right-hand lever towards the steering wheel forapproximately 1 second or move the selec-tor lever to the left.

– With the selector lever in position D/S, if nopaddle is operated during a short period oftime, the gearbox control system switchesback to automatic mode. To switch to per-manent manual gear change using thegearshift paddles, move the selector leverfrom position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automati-cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be-fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automaticgearbox will not shift down until there is norisk of over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, thegearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in position P or N. At low temperatures,below -10°C (+14°F), the engine can onlystart with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle– Press and hold the brake pedal.

– Press and hold the interlock button (thebutton on the selector lever handle), move

236

Start and driving

the selector lever to the desired position, forinstance D ››› page 233, and release theinterlock button.

– Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (aslight movement can be felt).

– Release the brake and press the accelera-tor ››› .

Stopping briefly– Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle

briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/ParkingIf the driver door is opened and the selectorlever is not in position P, the vehicle couldmove. The driver message will be: Gearchange: selector lever in the driveposition!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

– Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .

– Apply the handbrake.

– Move the selector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill– Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle “from moving backwards”;if necessary, apply the handbrake ››› . Donot try to stop the vehicle “rolling back” byincreasing the engine speed when a gear isengaged (pressing the accelerator) ››› .

Starting off uphill– Apply the handbrake.

– Once you have engaged a gear press theaccelerator carefully and disengage thehandbrake.

Driving downhill: in some situations (onmountain roads or when towing a trailer orcaravan) it can be advantageous to switchtemporarily to the manual gearbox pro-gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-ted manually to suit the driving conditions››› .

On level ground it is sufficient to move the se-lector lever to position P. On slopes, first en-gage the parking brake and then put the se-lection lever into the P position. This avoidsoverloading the locking mechanism and it willbe easier to move the selector lever from po-sition P.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 234.● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for longperiods. Constant braking causes over-heating in the brakes. This could signifi-cantly reduce braking power, increasebraking distance or even result in the totalfailure of the brake system.

● To avoid rolling back on gradients alwayshold the vehicle with the footbrake orhandbrake if you have to stop.

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.Apply the handbrake firmly or press thebrake pedal in order to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling back.● If you allow the car to roll with the selec-tor lever in position N with the engineswitched off, the automatic gearbox will bedamaged as it will not be lubricated.● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, such as frequently starting, pro-longed “creeping” of the vehicle or trafficjams with continuous stoppages, the gear-box could overheat causing damage! If thewarning lamp lights up, stop the vehicleas soon as possible and wait for the gear-box to cool ››› page 240.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown past the point of resistance at full »

237

Driving

throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lowergear, depending on road speed and enginespeed. The upshift to the next higher gear isdelayed until the engine reaches maximumrpm.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

Launch control program3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125kW and petrol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enablesmaximum acceleration.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-erating temperature and the steering wheelmust not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use thelaunch-control you must disconnect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-nect system menu ››› page 34. The

warning lamp will stay switched on or willflash slowly depending on whether or not thevehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) appearson the instrument panel to indicate the deac-tivation status.

– When the engine is running, switch off thetraction control (ASR)1).

– Turn the selector lever to the position “S” ortiptronic, or else select the sport drivingmode from the SEAT Drive Profile*››› page 274.

– Press the brake pedal firmly with your leftfoot and hold it down for at least one sec-ond.

– With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down posi-tion. The engine speed will stabilise atabout 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

– Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING● Always adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions.● Only use the launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit,and make sure your manner of driving andaccelerating the vehicle does not incon-venience or endanger other road users.● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the ASR and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start tospin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Riskof accident!● After moving off, the ESC “sport” modeshould be deactivated by briefly pressingthe button.

Note● After using the Launch control pro-gramme, the temperature in the gearboxmay have increased considerably. In thiscase, the programme could be disabled forseveral minutes. The programme can beused again after the cooling phase.● Accelerating with the Launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increasedwear and tear.

1) Vehicles without driver information system: thewarning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driverinformation system: the warning lamp stays on.

238

Start and driving

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps thedriver when driving down steep gradients.

Downhill speed control is activated when theselector lever is in D/S and the driver appliesthe foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-matically engages a lower gear that is suita-ble for the slope. The downhill speed controlfunction attempts to maintain the speed atwhich the vehicle was travelling when thefoot brake was applied (subject to the laws ofphysics and technical drive limitations). Itmay be necessary to adjust the speed againusing the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-en that the downhill speed control can onlychange down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-scents the tiptronic mode may be required. Inthis case, manually reduce the tiptronic to2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake andreduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 250, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot

be maintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energyof the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-tain stretches to be driven without using theaccelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia modeCondition: selector lever must be in positionD, gradients below 12 %.

– Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode››› page 274.

– Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis-played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-gage and the vehicle will roll freely, withoutthe effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switchoff the engine again, simply press the brakepedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and the switchingoff using inertia (= shorter section withoutthe need for fuel) facilitates improved fuelconsumption and emission balance.

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle and releasing the acceleratorpedal, that the vehicle will not deceleratein the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● Inertia mode is only available in eco(SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode.● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In in-ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-played (for example “E” will appear insteadof “E7”).● On downhill sections with gradientsabove 15 %, the inertia mode will automati-cally be switched off temporarily.

239

Driving

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a faultshould occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever areshown over a light background on the instru-ment panel display, there is a system faultand the automatic gearbox will operate inwith the backup programme. When the back-up programme is activated, it is possible todrive the vehicle, however, at low speeds andwithin a selected range of gears. In some ca-ses driving in reverse gear may not be pos-sible.

CAUTIONIf the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for thegearbox to cool with the engine at idlingspeed and the selector lever in position P.When the warning lamp and the driver mes-

sage switch off, have the fault corrected by aspecialised workshop without delay. If thewarning lamp and the driver message do notswitch off, do not continue driving. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Gearbox malfunctions Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the posi-tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restric-tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well awayfrom moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with ahigh temperature, this driver message will bedisplayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Gear-change recommenda-tion

Choosing the ideal gear

Fig. 223 Instrument panel: gear-change indi-cator (manual gearbox).

While driving, and depending on vehicleequipment, the instrument panel display may

240

Start and driving

show a recommendation with the gear num-ber that would be advisable to save fuel.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, theselector lever must be in the tiptronic position››› page 236.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-mal gear is already engaged. The currentgear will be displayed.

Display Meaning

The optimal gear is selected.

Changing to a higher gear is rec-ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec-ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” ofthe particulate filterThe exhaust system manager detects thatthe particulate filter is nearly saturated andcontributes to self-cleaning by recommend-ing the optimal gear. For this reason, it mightbe necessary to drive for a short time at ahigh rpm.

WARNINGThe gear change indicator is only an auxili-ary function and in no case should be asubstitute for careful driving.

● The responsibility of choosing the correctgear depending on the situation (e.g. over-taking, driving up or down a slope or towinga trailer) lies with the driver.

For the sake of the environmentSelecting the correct gear can help to savefuel.

NoteThe recommended gear indication turns offwhen the clutch pedal is pressed in vehi-cles with manual gearbox or when the se-lector lever is removed from the tiptronicposition in vehicles with an automatic gear-box.

Steering

Information related to vehiclesteering

Electro-mechanical power steering assiststhe driver when steering.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time orthe engine is switched off (for instance whenbeing towed), the car can still be steered, as

long as the key remains in the ignition. How-ever, more effort than normal will be requiredto turn the steering wheel.

Mechanical steering lockIn order to make the vehicle more difficult tosteal, you should always lock the steering be-fore leaving the vehicle.

The steering column is locked when the key isremoved from the ignition lock and the vehi-cle is stationary.

Activating the steering lock● Park the vehicle ››› page 223.● Remove the ignition key.● Turn the steering wheel slightly until thesteering lock has engaged.

Deactivating the steering lock● Turn the steering wheel slightly to releasethe lock.● Insert the key in the ignition lock.● Hold the steering wheel in this position andswitch on the ignition.

Power-assisted steeringPower-assisted steering helps the driver incritical situations. It recommends the rotationdirection of the steering wheel to perform acorrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), »

241

Driving

thereby causing a small turn of the wheel inthe correct direction to avoid skidding ››› .

WARNINGIf the power steering does not work, youwill need much more strength to turn thewheel. This has a considerable effect onvehicle safety.● The power steering only works when theengine is running.● Never allow the vehicle to move when theengine is switched off.● Never remove the key from the ignitionwhile the vehicle is moving. The steeringlock could be engaged and vehicle steer-ing would not work.

WARNINGPower-assisted steering, together with theESC, helps the driver to control vehiclesteering in critical situations. However, thedriver is ultimately responsible for steeringthe vehicle at all times. Power-assistedsteering does not remove this responsibili-ty.

NoteThe ignition of the vehicle being towedmust be switched on to prevent the steeringwheel from locking and also to allow theuse of the turn signals, horn, windscreenwipers and washers.

Control lamp

It lights up red

The electromechanical steering is damaged.Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely andas soon as possible.Have the steering checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up yellow

The operation of the electromechanical steering islimited.See a specialised workshop immediately and havethe steering checked.If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af-ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travel-led a short distance, you do not need to take it to aspecialised workshop.

Or: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and hasbeen connected again.Drive for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is tight.Turn the wheel a little to both sides.

Or: Not unlocked or blocked steering column.Remove the key from the ignition and then switch theignition back on. If necessary, check the messagesdisplayed on the instrument panel display.Do not drive on if the steering column remainslocked after the ignition has been switched on. Seekspecialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic. It could casedamage to the vehicle and cause acci-dents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

Run-in and economical driv-ing

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first1500 km (900 miles).

For the first 1,000 kilometres (600 miles)– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the

maximum speed.

– Do not accelerate hard.

– Avoid high engine revolutions.

– Do not tow a trailer.

242

Start and driving

From 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to1,500 kilometres (900 miles)– Speeds can be gradually increased to the

maximum road speed or maximum permis-sible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the inter-nal friction in the engine is greater than lateron, when all the moving parts have beddedin.

For the sake of the environmentIf the engine is run in gently, its life will beincreased and its oil consumption reduced.

Running-in of tyres and brake pads

New tyres should be run in carefully for thefirst 500 km (300 miles) and new brake padsshould be run in carefully for the first 200 km(125 miles).

During the first 200 km (125 miles) you haveto compensate for the reduced braking effectby applying more pressure to the brake ped-al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking dis-tance will be longer with new brake padsthan with brake pads which have been run-in.

WARNING● At first, new tyres do not give maximumgrip, and require running-in. This may

cause an accident. Drive particularly care-fully in the first 500 km (300 miles).● New brake pads must be “run in” and donot have the correct friction properties dur-ing the first 200 km (125 miles). However,the reduced braking capacity may be com-pensated by pressing on the brake pedal alittle harder.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-cycling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials.● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.

● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includingodour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-cle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

243

Driving

Economical and environmentally-friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-pends in large part on your driving style. Byadopting an economical driving style and an-ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you caneasily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-tion while saving money are listed below.

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may automati-cally deactivate some of the engine cylindersif the driving situation does not require toomuch power. When it is switched off, no fuel isinjected into these cylinders, hence total fuelconsumption may be reduced. The numberof active cylinders can be seen on the instru-ment panel display. ››› page 106.

Drive anticipating the traffic situationA vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.When you anticipate situations, you have tobrake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If itis possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear en-gaged, for example, if you see a red lightahead. The braking effect achieved in thisway helps to reduce the wear of brakes andtyres; emissions and fuel consumption are re-duced to zero (disconnection due to inertia).

Change gear early to save energyAn effective way of saving fuel is to changeup quickly through the gears. Running the en-gine at high rpm in the lower gears uses anunnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual transmission: shift up from first tosecond gear as soon as possible. We recom-mend that, whenever possible, you change toa higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Fol-low the “recommended gear” indication thatappears on the instrument panel››› page 240.

Avoid driving at high speedWe advise you not to drive at the top speedpermitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Drivingat moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idlingIt is worthwhile switching off the engine whenwaiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or attraffic lights with a long red phase. The fuelsaved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greaterthan the amount of fuel needed to restart theengine.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best

to drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenancePeriodic maintenance work guarantees that,before beginning a journey, you will not con-sume more than the required amount of fuel.A well-serviced engine gives you the benefitof improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeysTo reduce the consumption and emission ofpolluting exhaust gases, the engine and theexhaust gas filtration systems should reachthe optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is pro-portionally higher. The engine does not warmup and fuel consumption does not normaliseuntil having driven approximately four kilome-tres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommendavoiding short trips whenever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressuresBear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ade-quate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressureis just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuelconsumption can increase by as much as 5%.

244

Start and driving

Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear wear andimpairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checkedwhen the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weightGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable toalways check the luggage compartment tomake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sake ofconvenience, even when it is no longer nee-ded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind re-sistance caused by the roof rack even when itis not in use.

Save electricityThe engine activates the alternator, whichproduces electricity. With the need for elec-tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-ces when you do not need them. Examples ofdevices that use a lot of electricity are: theblower at high speeds, the rear window heat-ing or the seat heaters*.

Note● If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is notrecommended that you switch this functionoff.● It is recommended that you close thewindows when driving at more than60 km/h (37 mph).● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal,, as the pressure can make theplate spin, more fuel will be used and it canburn the clutch plate lining, causing a seri-ous fault.● Do not hold the car on a hill with theclutch, use the foot brake or hand brake,using the latter to start. The fuel consump-tion will be lower and you will prevent theclutch plate from being damaged.● On descents, use the engine brake,changing to the gear that is more suitablefor the slope. Fuel consumption will be“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Engine management andemission control system

Introduction

WARNING● Because of the high temperatures whichcan occur in the exhaust purification sys-

tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil-ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-haust can come into contact with flamma-ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass orat the forest edge). Fire hazard!● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faultylambda sensor).Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 246. »

245

Driving

It lights up

Fault in the management of the petrol engine.Have the engine checked by a specialised workshopas soon as possible.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control)lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys-tem operation is being verified. It should go out oncethe engine is started.

It lights up

Diesel engine glow plug system.The engine glow plug system has been activated.The engine can be started straight away when thelamp switches off.

Flashes

Fault in the management of the diesel engine.Have the engine checked by a specialised workshopas soon as possible.

NoteWhile the control lamps are on , , or there might be faults in the engine,fuel consumption may go up and the en-gine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-verter.● Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.● For engine oil changes, do not replenishwith too much engine oil ››› page 319, Top-ping up engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 59.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or lossof power when the vehicle is moving, reducespeed immediately and have the vehicle in-spected at the nearest specialised workshop.In general, the exhaust warning lamp will lightup when any of the described symptoms oc-cur ››› page 245. If this happens, unburnt fuelcan enter the exhaust system and escape in-to the environment. The catalytic convertercan also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause the irregularity of the fuel supplymay cause ignition problems. This allowsunburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system,which could cause overheating and dam-age the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the exhaust gas under someconditions. This depends on the sulphurcontent of the fuel used. Quite often theproblem can be solved by changing to an-other brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-mal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself.The particulate filter is cleaned automaticallywithout need for indication by the warninglamp . This may be noticed because theengine idle speed increases and an odourmay be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-ried out (because only short trips are taken,for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-ess by driving in the following manner:

● Drive for approximately 15 minutes at aminimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range).

246

Start and driving

● Maintain the engine speed at approximate-ly 2,000 rpm.

The rise in temperature causes the soot onthe filter to burn. On completion of the clean-ing the warning lamp will switch off. If thewarning lamp does not switch off, go immedi-ately to a specialised workshop to rectify theproblem.

Driving tips

Driving abroad

To drive abroad, the following must be takeninto consideration:

● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converterensure that unleaded petrol is available forthe journey. See chapter ››› page 310, Fuel.Automobile organisations will have informa-tion about service station networks selling un-leaded fuel.● In some countries, it is possible that yourcar model is not sold, and therefore somespare parts are not available or the technicalservices may only be able to carry out limitedrepairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladlyprovide information about the technical prep-aration that your vehicle requires and also

about necessary maintenance and repairpossibilities.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-ing through water, for example, along a floo-ded road, please observe the following:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through water, mud, sludge,etc., the braking effect can be delayedslightly due to moisture build-up on thediscs and brake pads. Applying the brakescarefully several times will remove themoisture and restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may se-verely damage vehicle components suchas the engine, transmission, running gear orelectrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 248.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine in any situation.● Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo-site direction may splash water that couldexceed the maximum permitted waterheight for your vehicle.● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion).

247

Driving

Driver assistance systems

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated.Start the engine manually

This driver message is displayed when cer-tain conditions are not met during the stop-ping phase and the Start-Stop system can-not restart the engine. The engine must bestarted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Takethe vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-paired.

Description and operation


The Start-Stop system helps save fuel andreduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping; for example when stopping at traf-fic lights. The ignition remains switched onduring the stopping phase. The engine auto-matically switches back on when required. Inthis scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

As soon as the ignition is switched on, theStart-Stop function is automatically activa-ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys-tem can be found on the Easy Connect sys-tem: by pressing the button / in the Ve-hicle status menu.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox● Before stopping the vehicle or when it isstopped, put it into neutral and release theclutch pedal. The engine will switch off. Thewarning lamp will appear on the instru-ment panel display. The engine may stop be-fore the vehicle comes to a halt in the decel-eration phase (at 7 km/h).● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lamp willswitch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox● Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to astop and keep the brake pedal pressed downwith your foot. The engine will switch off. Thewarning lamp will appear in the display.The engine may stop before the vehiclecomes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’sgearbox).● When you take your foot off the brake ped-al the engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.248


● The driver must have their seat belt fas-tened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine must have reached a minimumservice temperature.● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The system can interrupt the Start-Stopmode frequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch offBefore the stopping phase, the system verifieswhether certain conditions are met. The en-gine does not switch off, in the following sit-uations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the mini-mum required temperature for the Start-Stopmode.● The interior temperature selected for the airconditioner has not yet been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 41.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.

● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication is shown on the instrumentpanel display, and in addition, the driver infor-mation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itselfDuring a stopping phase the normal Start-Stop mode can be interrupted in the followingsituations: The engine restarts by itself with-out involvement from the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thevalue selected on the air conditioner.● Defrost function button activated››› page 41.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-matic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S, in addition to whenin Triptonic mode. With the selector lever inposition P, the engine will also remain switch-ed off when you take your foot off the brakepedal. In order to start the engine up againthe accelerator must be pressed, or anothergear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R dur-ing the stopping phase, the engine will startup again.

Change from position D to P to prevent theengine from accidentally starting whenchanging and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow-er steering functions will not be completelycovered under warranty. More force mayalso be needed to turn the steering wheelor to brake. As you cannot steer and brakein the normal manner, there is a greater riskof accidents and serious injury.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could lock making it impossible tosteer the vehicle.● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when workingin the engine compartment ››› page 250. »

249

Driving

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 250.

Note● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,you can control whether the engine shouldswitch off or not by reducing or increasingthe brake force applied. While the vehicleremains stopped, the engine will not stop ifthe brake pedal is slightly pressed, in trafficjams with frequent stopping and startingfor example. As soon as strong pressure isapplied to the brake pedal, the engine willstop.● In vehicles with manual gearbox, duringthe stopping phases the brake pedal mustremain depressed to prevent the vehiclefrom moving.● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles withmanual gearbox, it can be directly startedup again by immediately pressing theclutch pedal.● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, ifthe selector lever is placed in position D, Nor S after engaging reverse gear, the vehi-cle must be driven at a speed faster than 10km/h (6 mph) for the system to return toconditions in which the engine can be stop-ped.

Manually switching on/off theStart-Stop system

Fig. 225 Centre console: Start-Stop systembutton.

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button ››› Fig. 225.

The symbol on the button remains lit upyellow when the system is switched off, andthe following message is displayed on thedash panel:

Start-Stop system deactivated

NoteThe system is automatically switched oneach time the engine is deliberately stop-ped during a stopping phase. The enginewill start automatically.

Cruise control system(CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) isswitched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.


250


Cruise control operation

Fig. 226 Instrument panel display: CCS statusindications.


The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed byceasing to accelerate, not by actively brakingthe vehicle ››› .

Displayed on the CCS screenStatus Fig. 226:

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.System error. Contact a specialisedworkshop.CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS modeThe CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCSWhen travelling down hills the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicledown using the brake pedal and reducegears if required.

Automatic offThe cruise control system (CCS) is switchedoff automatically or temporarily:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-vene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

A

B

C

D

● If the brake pedal is pressed.● If the airbag is triggered.● If the gear lever of the DSG® dual clutchgearbox is removed from the D/S position.

WARNINGUse of the cruise control could cause acci-dents and severe injuries if it is not possibleto drive at a constant speed maintainingthe safety distance.● Do not use the cruise control in heavytraffic, if the distance from the vehicle infront is insufficient, on steep roads, withseveral bends or in slippery circumstances(snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-ded roads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Always adapt your speed and the dis-tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-bility, weather conditions, the condition ofthe road and the traffic situation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the prevailing road, traffic orweather conditions.● When travelling down hills, the CCS can-not maintain a constant speed. The vehicletends to accelerate under its own weight.Select a lower gear or use the foot brake toslow the vehicle.

251

Driving

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit-er is active.

Some warning and control lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Display indications

Fig. 227 On the instrument panel display: indi-cations of the speed limiter status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aspeed individually programmed upwards ofapproximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving inforwards gears ››› Display messages on the speed limiter››› Fig. 227:

The speed limiter is active. The last speedset is displayed in large figures.The speed limiter is not active. The lastspeed set is displayed in small or dark-ened figures.The speed limiter is switched off. The totalmileage is displayed.

A

B

C

WARNINGAfter use, always switch off the speed limit-er to prevent the speed being regulatedagainst your wishes.● The speed limiter does not relieve thedriver of their responsibility to drive at theappropriate speed. Do not drive at highspeed if not necessary.● Using the speed limiter under adverseweather conditions is dangerous and cancause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speedlimiter when the status of the road and theweather conditions allow it.● When driving downhill, the speed limitercannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speedwill increase due to its own weight. In thiscase, select a lower gear or use the footbrake to slow the vehicle.

Note● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versionsand instructions on the display may vary.● If when switching the ignition off, thecruise control system (CCS), the adaptivecruise control (ACC) or the speed limiterwere switched on, then the cruise controlsystem or the adaptive cruise control willautomatically switch themselves on whenthe ignition is back on. However, no speedwill be stored. The last set speed of thespeed limiter will be stored.

252


Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 228 On the left of the steering column:control and buttons to operate the speed limit-er.

Fig. 229 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the speed limiter.

Function Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 228or the third lever ››› Fig. 229 Effect

Switching on the speed limiter Move controller 1 to position and press button 2 of the turn signallever or move the third lever forward and press button 2 .

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speedlimiter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiterand cruise control (CCS) or the adap-tive cruise control (ACC) (with thespeed limiter switched on)

Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or theadaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter Press the button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the thirdlever.

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed andthe limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speedlimiter limitation

Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move thethird lever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will bestored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiterlimitation pressing down the accelera-tor (kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. toovertake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tem-porarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will bestored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re-turning to less than the set speed. »

253

Driving

Function Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 228or the third lever ››› Fig. 229 Effect

Switching the speed limiter on again Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into po-sition .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as thespeed you are driving at is lower than the speed set asmaximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area ormove the third lever into position to increase the speed in smallincrements of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area orhold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h(5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area orpress 1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small incrementsof 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area orhold down to continuously decrease the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the speed limiter Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lev-er into position . The system switches off.

The values shown in the table in brackets, inmph, are displayed only in instrument panelswith indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiterIf the set speed of the speed limiter is excee-ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

the warning and control lamps ››› page 252 flash and an acoustic warningmay sound. In this case, use the foot brake toslow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low-er gear.

Switching off temporarilyIf you wish to temporarily switch off the speedlimiter, e.g. to overtake, move control››› Fig. 228 1 of the turn signal lever into po-sition or the third lever into pressurepoint or press button 2 on any lever.

254


After overtaking, the speed limiter can beswitched on with the previously set speed bypressing button 3 on the turn signal lever inthe area or by moving the third lever intopressure point .

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily bypressing down the accelerator (kick-down)If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-down) and the set speed is exceeded be-cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter istemporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acousticsignal sound once. While the limiter is off, thewarning and control lamp flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer presseddown and the speed is reduced below the setvalue, the limiter switches on again. The con-trol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic offThe speed limiter is automatically switchedoff:

● If the system detects a fault that could neg-atively affect the working order of the limiter.● If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTIONFor automatic switching off due to systemfailures, for security reasons, the limiter is

only completely switched off when thedriver stops pressing the accelerator atsome point or consciously switches off thesystem.

Emergency braking assis-tance system (Front Assist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 230 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning indications.

The objective of the emergency braking as-sistance system is to prevent head-on colli-sions against objects that may be in the vehi-cle’s path or minimise the consequences ofsuch impacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the environ-mental conditions and by the system itself,the function acts in staggered fashion, de-

pending on how critical the situation is. Initial-ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac-tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti-vates an independent emergency braking.

The function is oriented at avoiding the fol-lowing situations:

● Collisions with parked vehicles or vehiclesin the same lane travelling in the same direc-tion.● Hitting pedestrians who cross in front of thevehicle's path or who are walking in the samelane and direction.

It may fail to activate in other danger situa-tions.

The Front Assist function is active within arange of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending onspeed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour,some of the sub-functions described beloware omitted in order to optimise the system’sgeneral behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistancefunction that can never replace the driv-er’s attention.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects a situation of dangerbecause the vehicle is too close to the vehicleahead, it will warn the driver by means of an »

255

Driving

indication on the instrument panel display.

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it may alert the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 230.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the pre-warning(advance warning), the system may activelyintervene in the brakes and generate a briefjolt to warn the driver of the imminent dangerof a collision.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independentemergency braking by progressively increas-ing the braking effect in accordance with howcritical the situation is.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys-temFaced with an imminent collision, the systemmay detect that the driver is not braking hardenough to avoid the collision. In this case, itwill automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and thelimitations of its operation, there are somecases in which the system cannot prevent acollision, although it can significantly mini-mise the consequences by reducing thespeed and the force of the impact.


WARNINGThe Front Assist system cannot change thelaws of physics or replace the driver interms of keeping control of the vehicle andreacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNINGFollowing a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision by brak-ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica-ble.● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedlyintervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.● In complex driving situations, occasional-ly the Front Assist may issue warnings andintervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex-ample at traffic islands.● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired, for example, by dirt or because theradar sensor has lost its settings, the sys-tem may issue unnecessary warnings andintervene inopportunely in the braking.● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-trians walking head-on in the same lane.● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

Note● When the Front Assist is connected, theindications on the instrument panel screenmay be concealed by warnings from otherfunctions, such as an incoming call.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted by

256


pressing the clutch, accelerator or movingthe wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenesseveral times unnecessarily), switch it off.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 231 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-er to determine the traffic situation››› Fig. 231 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, theFront Assist does not work. The instrumentpanel displays the following message: FrontAssist: No sensor vision! If necessaryclean the radar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will automati-cally be available again. The message willdisappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g. railson the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, for example if the suspension is lowered,Front Assist operation may be affected. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoidpossible dangerous situations caused by asystem malfunction. If this occurs have itadjusted.

● The sensor may become damaged orlose its settings when knocked, for exam-ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This maycompromise the system's efficacy or dis-connect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

257

Driving

Operating the Emergency brakingassistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 232 On the screen of the instrument panelFront Assist switched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning function (pre warn-ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 258,Switching the Front Assist off temporarilyin the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition on, Front Assist can be ena-bled or disabled in the Easy Connect systemwith the / button and the SETTINGS >Driver assistance function buttons››› page 34.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-ment panel will inform that it has beenswitched off with the following indicator ››› Fig. 232.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The pre-warning function (advance warning)can be switched on or off in the Easy Con-nect system with the / button and theSETTINGS and Driver assistance func-tion buttons ››› page 34.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warningfunction switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system instal-led in the vehicle, the advance warning func-tion may be adjusted as follows:

● Advance● Medium● Delayed● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in“Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and offIf the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning will

appear on the instrument panel display. In this case, increase the safe distance.

The distance warning can be switched onand off in the Easy Connect system using the / and the SETTINGS > Driver as-sistance function buttons ››› page 34.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tem-porarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● When the radar sensor is damaged.● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, forexample in a rear collision.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.● If the radar sensor is covered temporarilywith some kind of accessory, such as an ad-ditional headlight or the like.● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,ferry or train.

258


System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certaincircumstances, some of the system's reac-tions may be inopportune from the driver'sstandpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-vene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration.● On taking tight bends or complex paths.● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.● If the ASR has been disconnected or theESC activated in Sport mode manually››› page 228.● If the ESC is controlling.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works.● If the vehicle is reversing.● If the vehicle over-accelerates.

● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.● Misaligned vehicles.● Vehicles crossing the other's path.● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.● Special loads and accessories of other ve-hicles that jut out over the sides, backwardsor over the top.

Adaptive Cruise ControlACC*

Introduction


Fig. 234 Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an ex-tension of the normal cruise control sys-tem (CCS) ››› .

The ACC function allows the driver to pro-gram a cruise speed of between 30 and 210km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select the dis-tance required with regard to the vehicle infront.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruisespeed at all times, maintaining a safe dis-tance with the vehicle in front based on itsspeed.

When driving behind another vehicle, theACC function reduces speed until it is thesame as that of the vehicle ahead and main-tains the set distance between the vehicles. Ifthe vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptivecruise control also accelerates, going nohigher than the target speed programmed. »

259

Driving

If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle untilit stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

The distance programmed should be in-creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention promptDuring driving, the ACC is subject to certainlimitations inherent in the system. In otherwords, in certain circumstances the driver willhave to adjust speed him or herself, as well asthe distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 260.

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the ACC can-not overcome the system's inherent limita-tions or change the laws of physics. If usednegligently or involuntarily, it may causeserious accidents and injuries. The systemis not a replacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,on steep roads, with several bends or in

slippery circumstances such as snow, ice,rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads.● Never use the ACC when driving off-roador on unpaved roads. The ACC has beendesigned for use on paved roads only.● The ACC does not react on approachinga fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-ped at the traffic lights.● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-destrian monitoring system is available. Inaddition, the system does not react to ani-mals or vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-ciently, brake the vehicle immediately byapplying the pedal.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC function could automaticallyswitch off during your journey. Switch offthe system when starting off.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.● If the dash panel displays a driver inter-vention prompt, adjust the distance your-self.● The driver should be ready to accelerateor brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC.This will avoid possible damage. If this oc-curs have it adjusted.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.

Note● If the ACC system does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, do not use it until ithas been checked by a specialised work-shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this purpose.● Maximum speed with the ACC activatedis limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during automaticbraking cause by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument paneldisplay and control lamps

The speed reduction by the ACCto maintain the distance from thevehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver interventionprompt.

260


The ACC is not currently availa-ble.a)

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine andstart it up again. Check the radar sensor visually››› Fig. 236 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still unavail-able, refer to a specialised workshop to have the sys-tem inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colourdisplay is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmedspeed remains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC isactive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

The lamp lights up green.

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Indications on the display

Fig. 235 On the instrument panel display: (A)ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Instructions on the display ››› Fig. 235:Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-tive and is not regulating your speed.

1

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC isnot active and is not regulating your dis-tance.Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is activeand is regulating your speed.Distance level 2 set by the driver.ACC is active and is regulating your dis-tance based on speed.

NoteWhen the ACC is connected, the indica-tions on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 236 On the front bumper: radar sensor. »

2

3

4

5

261

Driving

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-er to determine the traffic situation››› Fig. 236 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case theadaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.The instrument panel displays the followingmessage: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec-essary clean the radar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automaticallybe available again. The message on the in-strument panel screen will switch off and theACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection. This may occur, forexample, in a closed car park or due to thepresence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, for example, if the suspension is lowered,ACC operation may be affected. In this sce-nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi-ble damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.● The sensor may become damaged orlose its settings when knocked, for exam-ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This maycompromise the system's efficacy or dis-connect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

Operating the Adaptive CruiseControl ACC

Fig. 237 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.

Fig. 238 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isconnected, the green control lamp will

262


light up on the instrument panel, and the pro-grammed speed and ACC status will be dis-played ››› Fig. 235.

What ACC settings are possible?● Setting your speed ››› page 263.● Setting your distance ››› page 263.● Connecting and activating the ACC››› page 263.● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC››› page 263.● Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey ››› page 263.● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 264.● Conditions in which the ACC does not re-act ››› page 264.

Setting speedTo set your speed, move the third lever loca-ted in position 1 upwards or downwards untilthe desired speed is shown on the instrumentpanel display. The speed adjustment is madeat 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set thecurrent speed as the vehicle’s cruise speedand activate the ACC, press the ››› Fig. 238 button. If you wish to increase orreduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6mph), move the lever to position 2››› Fig. 237 or press the button, respective-ly.

The set speed can be changed when the ve-hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.Any modification to the programmed speedwill be shown on the bottom left part of theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 235.

Setting your distance levelTo increase/reduce the distance level, pressthe rocker switch towards the left/right››› Fig. 238 A .

The instrument panel display shows the mod-ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis-tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-mends level 3. The set distance can bechanged when the vehicle is stopped or dur-ing driving, as you like ››› .

Connecting and activating the ACCTo connect and activate the ACC, the posi-tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehiclespeed and the position of the third level of theACC must all be taken into account.

● With a manual transmission, the gearboxselector lever must be in any gear exceptfirst, and the speed must be higher than ap-proximately 30 km/h. With an automatictransmission, the gearbox selector lever mustbe in position D or S.● To activate the ACC, with the third lever inposition 1 press the button or move thethird lever of the ACC to position 2››› Fig. 237. At this point, the image of the

ACC on the instrument panel display willswitch to Active mode ››› Fig. 235.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicletravels at a set speed and distance from thevehicle ahead. Both speed and distance canbe changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACCTo disconnect the ACC move the lever to the0 position ››› Fig. 237 (engaged). An ACCdeactivated message appears and thefunction is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, justto switch it temporarily to inactive mode(Standby), move the third lever to position 3››› Fig. 237 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door isopened.

Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journeyIn wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

● Very short● Short● Media »

263

Driving

● Long● Very long

In the Easy Connect system you can adjustthe distance level that will be applied whenthe ACC is connected using the / but-ton and the SETTINGS > Driver assis-tance ››› page 34.

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the drivingprofile selected can have an influence on theACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour››› page 274.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-haviour of the ACC can also be affected byselecting any of the following drive profiles inthe Easy Connect system:

● Normal● Sport● Eco● Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set-tings using the / button and the SET-TINGS > Driver assistance > ACC››› page 34.

The following conditions may lead theACC not to react:● If the accelerator is pressed.

● If there is no gear engaged.● If the ESC is controlling.● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the vehicle is reversing.● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar-antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-activated. The sensor has lost its setting or isdamaged. Take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currentlynot available. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver ifthe radar sensor's vision is impaired due, forexample, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.Clean the sensor ››› Fig. 236.

ACC: currently not available.Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot beguaranteed. The ACC cannot be switchedon.

ACC: only available in D, S orM

Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake appliedThe ACC is deactivated if the parking brake isapplied. The ACC is available once again af-ter the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available.Intervention of stability control

The message for the driver is displayed whenthe electronic stability control (ESC) inter-venes. In this case, the ACC is automaticallyswitched off.

ACC: Take action!The message for the driver is displayed if,when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mildslope, the vehicle rolls back even althoughthe ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stopthe vehicle from moving/colliding with anoth-er vehicle.

ACC: speed limitThe message for the driver is displayed if, invehicles with manual gearbox, the currentspeed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switchesoff if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2ndgear

264


The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear(manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speedThe message for the driver is displayed if,when the ACC accelerates or brakes, thedriver does not shift up or down a gear intime, which means exceeding or not reachingthe permissible engine speed. The ACCswitches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch appliedVehicles with manual transmission: pressingthe clutch pedal for longer abandons controlmode.

Door openVehicles with automatic transmission: theACC cannot be activated with the vehiclestationary and the door open.

WARNINGThere is a danger of rear collision when theminimum distance to the vehicle in front isexceeded and the speed difference be-tween both vehicles is so great that aspeed reduction by the ACC will not suf-fice. In this case the brake pedal should beapplied immediately.● The ACC may not be able to detect allsituations properly.● “Stepping” on the accelerator maycause the ACC not to intervene in braking.Driver braking will have priority over inter-

vention by the speed control or adaptivecruise control.● Always be ready to use the brakes!● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.● It is dangerous to activate control and re-sume the programmed speed if the road,traffic or weather conditions do not permitthis. Risk of accident!

Note● The programmed speed is erased oncethe ignition or the ACC are switched off.● When the traction control system (ASR) isdeactivated during acceleration or else theESC is activated in Sport* Mode(››› page 34), the ACC switches off au-tomatically.● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,the engine switches off automatically dur-ing the ACC stopping phase and restartsautomatically to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtakingin an inside lane

Fig. 239 On the instrument panel display:ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has afunction that helps avoid overtaking whiledriving in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at aslower speed in an outer lane, it is displayedon the multifunction display ››› Fig. 239.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an insidelane the system will gently brake, and in ac-cordance with the speed will prevent the carfrom overtaking. The driver can override thisfunction at any time by pressing the acceler-ator pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or incity traffic.

265

Driving

Deactivating the Adaptive CruiseControl ACC temporarily in certainsituations

In the following situations the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) should be deactivated due tothe system's limitations ››› :

● When changing lanes, on tight bends androundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-tion lanes on motorways or in sections withroad works to prevent involuntary accelera-tion to reach the programmed speed.● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.● On roads with several lanes, when other ve-hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as thevehicle in front might not be detected proper-ly or, in certain circumstances, might not bedetected at all.

WARNINGIf the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-uations.

NoteIf you do not switch off the ACC in theaforementioned situations, you may com-mit a legal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 240 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 241 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) Onevehicle turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer-tain physical limitations inherent in the sys-tem. For example, certain reactions of theACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex-pected or come late from the driver's point ofview. So pay attention in order to intervene ifnecessary.

For example, the following traffic situationscall for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase(only vehicles with automatic gearbox)After a stopping phase, the ACC may begindriving automatically when the vehicle infront drives off ››› .

266


When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. trafficjam), the instrument panel display shows theACC ready to start message. If the vehi-cle ahead drives off again, the ACC will alsodo so automatically.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again,the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the ACCready to start status by operating thethird lever repeatedly towards position 2››› Fig. 237 or by pressing the brake pedal. Ifthe Press the brake message is shown onthe instrument panel, press the brake. If youdo not, an acoustic warning will be heard andthe ACC will switch to inactive mode (Stand-by). At this point, the vehicle may begin tomove towards the stopped vehicle ahead››› .

OvertakingWhen the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, theACC accelerates the vehicle automaticallyand thus reduces the distance from the vehi-cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,if the ACC does not detect another vehicle infront, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake or moving thethird lever backwards ››› page 262.

Driving through a bendOn entering or exiting bends, the radar sensormay stop detecting the vehicle in front or re-acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane››› Fig. 240 A In these situations the vehiclemay brake unnecessarily or fail to react tothe vehicle in front. In this case, the driver hasto intervene by accelerating or interruptingthe braking process by applying the brake orpushing the third lever backwards››› page 262.

Driving in tunnelsWhen driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehiclesThe radar sensor can only detect narrow ormisaligned vehicles when they are withinrange ››› Fig. 240 B. This applies particularlyto narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. Inthese cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-riesSpecial loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-cles with special loads and accessories or

when overtaking them. In these cases, youshould brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanesVehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors.Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-act ››› Fig. 241 C. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Stationary vehiclesThe ACC does not detect stationary objectswhile driving, such as traffic tails or damagedvehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehiclein front of it, the ACC will not react to it››› Fig. 241 D. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your pathThe ACC does not react to vehicles ap-proaching from the opposite direction or ve-hicles crossing your path.

Metal objectsMetal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheetsused in road works, can confuse the radarsensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. »

267

Driving

Factors that may affect how the radarsensor operatesIf laser sensor operation is impaired, due toheavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC isdeactivated temporarily. The relevant textmessage will appear in the dash panel dis-play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor››› Fig. 236.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automaticallybe available again. The message on the in-strument panel screen will switch off and theACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection, for example in aclosed car park.

Trailer modeWhen driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically.

Overheated brakesIf the brakes overheat, for example afterabrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,the ACC may be deactivated temporarily.The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display. In this case, adaptivecruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivatedonce brake temperature has cooled suffi-ciently. The message will disappear from the

instrument panel display. If the message ACCnot available remains on for quite a longtime it means that there is a fault. Contact aspecialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNINGIf you do not heed the Press the brakemessage, the vehicle may initiate an invol-untary movement and could crash into thevehicle ahead. In any event, before drivingoff, check that the road is clear. The radarsensor may not detect obstacles on theroad. This could cause an accident and se-rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

268


Blind spot detector (BSD)with parking assistance(RCTA)*

Introduction

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detectthe traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helpsthe driver when backing out of a parallelparking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developedfor driving on paved roads.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe blind spot detector (BSD) with parkingassistance (RCTA) included cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if the blind spot detection system orthe rear cross traffic alert are used negli-gently or involuntarily. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● Pay attention to the control lamps thatmay come on in the external rear view mir-rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-low any instructions they may give.● The blind spot assistant could react toany special constructions that might bepresent on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. highor irregular dividers. This may cause erro-neous warnings.● Never use the blind spot detector withrear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-fic alert has been designed for use onpaved roads.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● Never use the blind spot detector or theparking assistant if the radar sensors aredirty.● The external rear view mirror controllamps may have limited functionality dueto solar radiation.

CAUTION● The radar sensors on the rear bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space. This may result inthe system disconnecting itself, or at leastpossibly having its functionality diminished.

● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper free ofsnow and ice and do not cover it.● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by SEAT. The blindspot detector's functions may be limited orwork incorrectly if other paints are used.

NoteIf the blind spot detector with parking as-sistant does not work as described in thischapter, do not use it and contact a speci-alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-cle in the blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in theblind spot and the turn signal has been turned on inthe direction of the detected vehicle ››› .

Some warning and control lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on to »

269

Driving

check certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.

If there are no indications from the controllamp in the external rear view mirror, thismeans that the blind spot detector has notdetected any other vehicles in the area ››› .

If the dipped beam is on, then the controllamps in the external rear view mirrors will bedimmed (night mode).

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and causeaccidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and cor-responding text messages when they lightup may result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 242 On external rear-view mirrors: blindspot detector display.

Fig. 243 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensorareas.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors tomonitor the areas behind the vehicle››› Fig. 243. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The blind spot de-tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-cal signals in the external rear view mirrors tonotify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrorsThe control lamp (expanded view) providesan indication in the corresponding externalmirror ››› Fig. 242 regarding the traffic situa-tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to becritical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation tothe left of the vehicle, and the control lamp ofthe right-hand external mirror indicates thetraffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

270


In the case of retrofitted tinted windows orwindows with tinted film, the indications of theexternal mirrors may not be seen clearly orcorrectly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free ofsnow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside ››› Fig. 243. The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 244, ››› Fig. 245. The range tothe sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than thewidth of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect station-ary objects such as dividers, and thus give anincorrect indication.

271

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 244 Schematic diagram: Passing situa-tion with traffic behind the vehicle. Indicationfrom the blind spot detector in the left-hand ex-ternal mirror.

Fig. 245 Schematic diagram: Situation ofpassing and then moving into the right-handlane. Indication from the blind spot detectorin the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 244 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 245 (arrow):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 244 .● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 245 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-er an indication will be displayed in the exter-nal mirror, because the blind spot detectortakes into account the speed differential withother vehicles. Thus even though the distancefrom the other vehicle is identical, the indica-tion will appear sooner in some cases andlater in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the systemIn some situations the blind spot detectormay not interpret the traffic situation correct-ly. E.g. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;● in the case of lanes with different widths;● at the top of slopes;● in adverse weather conditions;

272


● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-ers.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 246 Diagram of the parking assistant: de-tected area around the vehicle that is drivingoff.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensorson the rear bumper ››› Fig. 243 to monitor thetraffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backsout of a parallel parking space or as it is be-ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else onthe road is approaching the rear of the vehi-cle ››› Fig. 246, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, if the vehi-cle is equipped with the park assist system,the driver is also informed by means of a visu-al signal on the radio screen. This signal isdisplayed in the form of a red strip at theback of the image of the vehicle on the radioscreen. This strip displays the side of the vehi-cle towards which traffic is approaching.1)

Automatic braking to reduce damagesIf the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approaching therear of the vehicle and the driver does notstep on the brake, the system will engage thebrakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The automatic intervention on thebrakes takes place when driving in reverse atapprox. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detectingthat the vehicle is stationary, the systemkeeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal orthe brake pedal in order to regain control ofthe vehicle.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe rear cross traffic alert cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. The parking assistant functionshould not tempt you into taking any risks.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.● The system should never be used in limi-ted visibility conditions or complicatedtraffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or whencrossing multiple lanes.● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-cle's surroundings, since the system oftenfails to detect things such as bicycles orpedestrians.● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equippedwith a parking system.

273

Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spotdetector (BSD) with parking assistant(RCTA)The blind spot detector with parking assistantcan be switched on and off by accessing theAssistance systems menu on the dashpanel display using the steering wheel con-trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-function camera, it can also be accessed bymeans of the driver assistance systems keylocated on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

● Blind spot● Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel ischecked , the functionality will be automat-ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-erate, the indications in the external mirrorswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automaticallydeactivated, it will only be possible to restartthe system after turning the vehicle off andrestarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spotdetector (BSD)The radar sensors of the blind spot detectorwith rear cross traffic alert will be automati-cally deactivated when, among other rea-sons, one of the sensors is detected to bepermanently covered. This may be the caseif, for example, there is a layer of snow or icein front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

Trailer modeThe Blind spot detector and the rear crosstraffic alert will be automatically deactivatedand it will be impossible to activate them ifthe tow hitch is electrically connected to atrailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the blind spot detectorand the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched fromthe vehicle, if you want to use the blind spotdetector and the rear cross traffic alert, youwill have to reactivate them in the corre-sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,then the blind spot detector and the rearcross traffic alert will have to be deactivatedmanually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction

SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between four profiles or modes, Nor-mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that modi-fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions,providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configuredaccording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles are fixed.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

EngineDepending on the profile selected, the engineresponds more spontaneously or more in har-mony with the movements of the accelerator.Additionally, when Eco mode is selected, theStart-stop function is automatically activa-ted.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change points are modified to positionthem in lower or higher engine speed ranges.

274


Additionally, the Eco mode activates the Iner-tia function, enabling consumption to be fur-ther reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau-ses the gear shift recommendations that ap-pear on the instrument panel to vary, facilitat-ing more efficient driving.

“Dual Ride” suspensionThe “Dual Ride” suspension features a com-fortable suspension in the Eco and Normalprofiles, suitable for daily use. Contrastingwith this it features a sporty suspension in theSport profile, suitable for a sporty drivingstyle. In the Individual profile the suspen-sion can be switched between Normal orSport, depending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus-pension, the following message is displayedon the instrument panel screen Fault:shock absorber regulation.

AddressPower steering becomes more robust inSport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioningIn vehicles with Climatronic, this can operatein eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)The acceleration and braking gradient of theadaptive cruise control varies according tothe active driving profile ››› page 259.

Setting driving mode

Fig. 247 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but-ton.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco andIndividual.

You can select the required mode either byrepeatedly pressing the button MODE››› Fig. 247, or on the touch screen, in themenu that opens when the above button ispressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system displayinforms about the active mode.

The MODE button light remains lit up yellowwhen the active mode is different to Normal.

Drivingprofile Characteristics

Normal Offers a balanced driving experi-ence, suitable for everyday use.

SportProvides a complete dynamic per-formance in the vehicle, enablingthe user a more sporty driving style.

EcoPlaces the vehicle in a particularlylow state of consumption, facilitat-ing a fuel-saving driving style that isrespectful to the environment.

Individual

Enables some configurations to bemodified by pressing the Profilesettings button. The functionsthat can be adjusted depend onthe equipment fitted in the vehicle.

WARNINGWhen operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the vehicle is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition key was removed. Never-theless, when the engine is restarted, theengine and the gear will start by default inthe Normal setting. For engine and gear torevert to the desired position, select thecorresponding drive profile again or press »

275

Driving

the Easy Connect system button repeated-ly.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-fic conditions.● The Eco profile is not recommended whentowing a vehicle.

Kick-down

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

If the eco* ››› page 275 mode has been se-lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the accel-erator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en-gine power is automatically controlled to giveyour vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

Park Assist*

Introduction

The Park Assist system is an additional func-tion of ParkPilot ››› page 284 and helps thedriver to:

● find a suitable parking space,● select a parking mode,● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,● park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-ular spaces,● exit a parking space driving forwards from aparallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory radio the front, rear and side areas arerepresented, and the position of obstacles isshown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

WARNINGThe technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherentin the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that may

compromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detect, atleast correctly, these objects or peoplewearing such clothes.● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● The ultrasound sensors have blind spotsin which obstacles and people are not reg-istered.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certainobjects in all situations.

WARNINGQuick turns of the steering wheel whenparking or exiting a parking space withPark Assist can cause serious injury.● Do not hold the steering wheel duringmanoeuvres to park or exit a parking space

276


until the system requests it. Doing so disa-bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trail-er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,or an open (or opening) rear lid, whichcould damage the vehicle.● Retrofitting of certain accessories to thevehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-fere with the operation of the Park Assistsystem and cause damage.● The Park Assist system uses as a refer-ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheelsare not damaged while parking. If necessa-ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.● The ultrasound sensors on the bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, donot apply it directly unless very briefly andalways from a distance of more than 10 cm.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– false detections,

– loss of sensor visibility.– cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-aged, the area corresponding to that groupof sensors (front or rear) is deactivated andcannot be activated until the fault is cor-rected. However, you can still use the sen-sors of the other bumper as per usual. Ifthere is a fault in the system, consult a spe-cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Note● In order to guarantee good system oper-ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and donot cover them with adhesives or other ob-jects.● Certain sources of noise, such as roughasphalt or paving stones and the noise ofother vehicles can induce the Park Assistsystem or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-ings.● In order to become familiar with the sys-tem and its functions, SEAT recommendsthat you practice operating the Park Assistsystem in an area where there is not toomuch traffic or in a car park.

Description of the Park Assist sys-tem

Fig. 248 In the centre console: button toswitch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in the frontand rear bumpers, the button ››› Fig. 248to switch the system on and off and the mes-sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-terrupting the manoeuvres for parking orexiting a parking spacePark Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

● Press the button.● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h(4 mph).● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. »

277

Driving

● The parking manoeuvre does not end within6 minutes from the activation of automaticsteering.● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).● ASR is switched off.● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristicsThe Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exita parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver tochange between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object present ata distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display toturn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. Thisway, the system will require fewer manoeu-vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer modeThe Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 295 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheelIf, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correct-ly, the circumference of the new wheel maybe different and the system may need toadapt to it. The adaptation is automatic andtakes place during driving. Making turns slow-ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])for a few minutes may contribute to thisadaptation process ››› in Introduction onpage 276.

278


Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 249 Overview of reduced displays for park-ing modes: Parallel parking in reverse. Per-pendicular parking in reverse. Perpendicularparking forwards.

Fig. 250 On the instrument panel display: dis-play of the assisted parking system with de-creased visibility.

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assistwith prior step in front of the spaceAfter activating the Park Assist system and af-ter detecting a parking space, the display onthe instrument panel proposes a parkingmode. The Park Assist system selects theparking mode automatically. The selected

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 250. The reduced display of oth-er possible parking modes is also shown››› Fig. 249. If the mode selected by the sys-tem does not correspond to the desiredmode, you can select another mode bypressing the button ››› Fig. 248.

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 281.

2.

Press the button.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on. Additionally, theselected parking mode is shown on the instru-ment panel display and the reduced displayshows another parking mode it can bechanged to.

Action

3.

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towardsthe side of the road where you are parking.The instrument panel displays the side corre-sponding to the road. By default, if the turnsignal is not on, it parks on the right in the di-rection of traffic.

4.

If necessary, press the button again tochange to the next parking mode.

Once you have switched to all possible park-ing modes, if the button is pressed again,the system switches off.

5. Press the button again to switch the systemback on.

6.Follow the instructions displayed on the in-strument panel while paying attention to traf-fic and drive the vehicle past the parkingspace. »

279

Driving

Special case of perpendicular parkingspace to park forwards without drivingpast first

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 281.

Action

2.Drive forward towards the parking space whilepaying attention to traffic and stop the vehi-cle.

Action

3.

Press the button once.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on. Additionally, theselected parking mode is shown on the instru-ment panel display without reduced display.

4. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc-tion on page 276.

280


Park with Park Assist

Fig. 251 On the instrument panel display: per-pendicular parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 252 On the instrument panel display: paral-lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park-ing position. Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 251 and Fig. 252:Message to move forwardsYour vehicleParked vehicleParking space detectedMessage to parkMessage to press the brake pedalProgress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Progress barsThe progress bar››› Fig. 251 7 and ››› Fig. 252 7 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of the pro-gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As-sist

For parallel parkingspaces

For perpendicularparking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on››› page 228. »

281

Driving

For parallel parkingspaces

For perpendicularparking spaces

Do not exceed approxi-mately 40 km/h

(25 mph) when drivingpast the parking space.

Do not exceed approxi-mately 20 km/h

(12 mph) when drivingpast the parking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres whendriving past the parking space.

Length of the space:length of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Width of the space:width of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) whenparking.

Parking

Do the following:

1.The necessary conditions have to be met topark with Park Assist ››› page 281 and theparking mode must be selected ››› page 279.

2.

Look at the display on the instrument panel tosee if the space has been detected as “appro-priate” and if the correct position for parkinghas been reached ››› Fig. 251 or ››› Fig. 252.

The space is considered “appropriate” if thedisplay on the instrument panel shows themessage to park 5 .

3. Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en-gage the reverse gear.

Do the following:

4. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc-tion on page 276.

5.

Please note the following message: Auto-matic steering enabled. Pay at-tention to your surroundings.While you keep watch around you, carefullystart accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h(4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system on-ly takes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.

6.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal isheard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displaysthe message to go forwards ››› Fig. 251 or ››› Fig. 252 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displaysthe message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar 7 indicates the distance tocover ››› page 281.

7.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-sist system has finished turning the steeringwheel.

OR: until the symbol on the instrument pan-el display switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis-play shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-ward and back until it centres it in the space››› Fig. 251 or ››› Fig. 252 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each ma-noeuvre until the Park Assist system has finish-ed turning the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acousticsignal sounds.

NoteIf the manoeuvre is terminated prematurelyduring parking, the result may not be thebest.

282


Exiting a parking space with ParkAssist (only for parallel spaces)

Fig. 253 On the instrument panel display:driving off from perpendicular parking.

Key to the Fig. 253:Parked vehicleYour vehicle in reverse gearProgress bar to indicate the distance leftto coverMessage giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist● Only for parallel parking spaces● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 228.● Length of the space: length of the vehicle+ 0.5 metres

1

2

3

4

● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking spaceDo the following:

For parallel parking spaces

1.The necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist have to be met››› page 283.

2. Switch on the engine ››› page 217.

3.Press the button ››› Fig. 248.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on.

4.Turn on the corresponding turn signal towardsthe road you will enter when exiting the park-ing space.

5. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector leverto position R.


6.

Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc-tion on page 276.

Please note the following message: Auto-matic steering enabled. Pay at-tention to your surroundings.While you keep watch around you, carefullystart accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h(4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the systemonly takes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.

7.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal isheard.

OR: go backwards until the instrument paneldisplay shows the message to go forward.

The progress bar ››› Fig. 253 3 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 281.

8.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-sist system has finished turning the steeringwheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the symbol on the instrument panel displayswitches off. »

283

Driving


9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis-play shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-ward and back until it can exit the space.

10.

The vehicle can exit the space when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acousticsignal sounds.

Take charge of the steering with the turningangle set by the Park Assist system.

11. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parkingspace.

Automatic braking intervention byPark Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking intime ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoidexceeding the speed limitTo avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leavinga parking space, the brakes may activate au-

tomatically. After automatically activatingthe brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit aparking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit a park-ing space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damagesDepending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake thevehicle when faced with an obstacle, brieflyactioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNINGThe automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.● The Park Assist system is subject to cer-tain limitations inherent to the system. Incertain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.

● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● The automatic braking intervention willend after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

Assorted assistance systems – which varydepending on the equipment fitted in the car– will help you when parking or manoeuvring:

– Parking System Plus. It assists the driverby visually and audibly warning them aboutobstacles detected in front and behind thevehicle ››› page 286.

– Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visualassistant that warns about obstacles loca-ted behind the vehicle ››› page 290.

WARNING● Always pay attention, also when lookingstraight ahead, to traffic and the vehiclesurroundings. The assistance systems arenot a replacement for driver awareness.When inserting or removing the vehiclefrom a parking space, or when performing

284


similar manoeuvres the driver always as-sumes the responsibility.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● The ultrasound sensors have blind spotsin which obstacles and people are not reg-istered. Pay special attention to childrenand animals.● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking Aid functions may be negatively af-fected by different factors that may lead todamage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-rounds:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Objects such as chains, trailer draw

bars, fences, posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detectthese objects or people wearing suchclothes correctly.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● Please note that low obstacles detectedby the system may no longer be registeredby the sensors as the car moves closer, sothe system will not give any further warn-ing. In certain circumstances, objects suchas high kerbs that could damage the bot-tom of the vehicle are not detected either.● If the first warning from the Parking Aid isignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-ble damage.● The knocks or damage on the radiatorgrille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un-derbody can adjust the orientation of thesensors. This can affect the parking aidfunction. In this case, have the functionchecked by a specialised workshop.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– false detections,– loss of sensor visibility.

Note● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area, e.g:

– with rough or cobbled floors or groundwith long grass;

– with external ultrasound sources, suchas cleaning vehicles or other vehiclesequipped with ultrasound systems;

– in downpours, intense snow, hail ordense exhaust gases,

– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface,

– or in locations such as the brow of ahill.

● In order to guarantee good system oper-ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean,free of snow or ice, and do not cover themwith adhesives or other objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap-ply it directly only very briefly and alwaysfrom a distance of more than 10 cm.● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,such as a bicycle rack, may interfere withthe operation of the Parking Aid.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● In order to familiarise yourself with thesystem, it is advised that you practice park-ing in an area or car park that is free fromtraffic. There must be good weather andlight conditions. »

285

Driving

● The volume and tone of the warnings canbe modified, in addition to the indications››› page 291.● In vehicles without an infotainment sys-tem, these parameters can be modified in aSEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 292.● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 254 Represented area.

During parking, Parking System Plus assiststhe driver by visually and audibly warning

them about obstacles detected in front ofand behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated inthe front and rear bumpers. When they de-tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audiblewarnings and visually on the Easy Connectsystem.

In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au-dible warning will be emitted. You can tellwhether the risk is in front of or behind the ve-hicle by choosing different sound frequencieson Easy Connect.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 337.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 m1.60 m0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: do not continue tomove forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

A

B

C

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missingareas are screened and obstacles at thesides of the vehicle are displayed››› Fig. 254 C .

Special features of ParkPilot with AreaViewIn the following situations the screened areaon the side of the vehicle is automatically hid-den:

● When a vehicle door is opened.● When the ASR is switched off.● When there is ASR or ESC regulation.● If the vehicle remains stationary for morethan approximately 3 minutes.

286


Parking Aid operation

Fig. 255 Centre console: parking aid button(depending on the version).

Manual connection of Parking Aid● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid● Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstaclethat is in its forwards path at a speed below

15 km/h (9 mph) ››› page 287. The obstacle isdetected from a distance of approx. 95 cm ifthe automatic connection is activated in theinfotainment system. A reduced display isshown.● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Move the selector lever to position P.● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up yellow whenthe system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 256 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation.

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-matically, a miniature of the vehicle and thesegments will appear on the left of the dis-play ››› Fig. 256.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-proaching an obstacle located in front of thevehicle. It only operates every time the speedis reduced below approximately 15 km/h (9mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carriedout in order for it to automatically switch on:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be-fore reducing speed below this number again. »

287

Driving

● OR: place the selector lever in position Pand then move it from this position.● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aidminiature indication can be switched on andoff from the Easy Connect system menu››› page 34:

● Switch the ignition on.● Select: Infotainment button SETTINGS> Parking and manoeuvring function but-ton.● Select the Automatic activation option.When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automati-cally, an audible sound warning will only begiven when obstacles in front are at a dis-tance of less than 50 cm.

CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 257 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstaclecan be estimated using the segments aroundthe vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

they are displayed whenthe obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-cle or further if it is not within the vehi-cle's trajectory or the direction of travelis in the opposite direction to its location,and also when the electronic parkingbrake is activated.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Moreover, with the Media System Plus, NaviSystem or Navi System Plus systems, a yellowtrail indicates the vehicle's expected trajecto-ry based on the steering angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-cles are represented in red, including thoseout of the path. Do not continue to move for-ward (or backward) ››› in Introduction onpage 284, ››› in Introduction onpage 285 !

Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Automatic activation on – activates the Automatic activa-tion option ››› page 287.

Red segments:

288


off – deactivates the Automatic acti-vation option ››› page 287.

Front volume*Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*Frequency (tone) of the sound in the frontarea.

Rear volume*Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volumeWith the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reduced tothe intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it isswitched on, if a message reporting a Parkingaid error is displayed on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon-necting the ignition, the next time that the

parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audiblesignal of the existence of a fault will be is-sued.

If there is a fault in the parking aid system amessage will appear on the instrument panelindicating the error.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display infront of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor isfaulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis-played ››› Fig. 254. If a front sensor is faulty,only the obstacles in area B are displayed.


Driving with a trailer

Fig. 258 Parking assist display on the screenwith trailer attached.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid rearsensors will not be activated when reversegear is engaged, when the selector lever isturned to position R or when the button ispressed.

The distance to possible obstacles at the rearof the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis-played on the screen and will not be indica-ted by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will onlydisplay objects detected at the front, and thevehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braking while manoeuvring func-tion*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvringfunction activates emergency braking when itdetects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path thatcould cause a collision, driving forwards or inreverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid isactivated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6 »

289

Driving

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function iscontrolled in the Easy Connect system withthe button and the SETTINGS > Parkand manoeuvre function buttons.

● on – permits the use of the braking whilemanoeuvring function.● off – does not permit the use of thebraking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theBraking while manoeuvring button that appears

on the Parking System screen of the EasyConnect system.● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visualassistant that warns of obstacles located be-hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible warnings and visuallyon the Easy Connect system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 337.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

0.60 m1.60 m

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Move the selector lever to position P.● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)or faster.


Side area:Central area:

Change from reduced view to full view● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in Intro-duction on page 284, ››› in Introductionon page 285 !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection● Engage reverse (for manual gears) or setthe selector lever to R (for automatic gears).

Parking Aid disconnection● Place the selector level in position P, N or D(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintainthe system active for approximately 8 sec-onds before switching off. During that time,Parking assist will switch off if:

290


● The selector lever is moved to position P.● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.


Switch from reduced to full-screen view ifthe rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera“RVC”)● Press the car icon in the reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: press the RVC function button.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 259 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima-ted with the help of the segments at the rearof the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

they are displayed whenthe obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-cle or further if the direction of travel is inthe opposite direction to its location, andalso when the electronic parking brake isactivated.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-cles are represented in red (including thoseout of the path). Do not continue to reverse››› in Introduction on page 284, ››› inIntroduction on page 285!

Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Rear volume*Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea. »

Red segments:

291

Driving

Adjust volumeWith the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reduced tothe intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it isswitched on, if a message reporting a Parkingaid error is displayed on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the system.

If the fault disappears before disconnectingthe ignition, the next time that the parking aidis engaged in reverse, no audible signal of theexistence of a fault will be issued.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display.


Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid willnot be activated when reverse gear is engag-ed (manual gears) nor when the selector lev-er is turned to position R (automatic gears).

Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-era”*

Operating and safety warnings


WARNING● The Rear Assist does not make it possibleto precisely calculate the distance fromobstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and norcan it overcome the system's own limits,hence using it may cause serious accidentsand injuries if used negligently or withoutdue care. The driver should be aware ofhis/her surroundings at all times to ensuresafe driving.● The camera lens expands and distortsthe field of vision and displays the objectson the screen in a different, vague manner.The perception of distances is also distor-ted by this effect.● Due to the screen resolution or insuffi-cient light conditions, some items may bedisplayed in an unsatisfactory manner ornot at all. Take special care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not be

displayed on screen and could damage thevehicle.● The rear assist has blind spots where it isnot possible to represent people or objects(small children, animals and certain ob-jects cannot be detected in its field of vi-sion). Monitor the vehicle's surroundingarea at all times.● Keep the camera lens clean, free of iceand snow, and do not cover it.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking oper-ation at all times, as well as the vehicle'ssurrounding area. Adapt your speed anddriving style at all times to suit visibility,weather, road and traffic conditions.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images on the rear assist screen areonly two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa-tial depth, protruding parts or holes in theroad, for example, are more difficult to de-tect or may not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the orientation lines displayed. Thewidth represented by the lines diminisheswith vehicle load. Pay special attention tothe vehicle's surroundings when the insideof the vehicle of the luggage compartmentis carrying a heavy load.● In the following situations, the objects orother vehicles shown in the navigation sys-tem display appear to be further away or

292


closer than they really are: Pay special at-tention:– On moving from a horizontal plane to a

slope.– On moving from a slope to a horizontal

plane.– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the

rear.– When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface orare jutting out from it. These objectsmay also be outside the camera's an-gle of vision when reversing.

Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if you are not yet familiarwith the system.● Rear assist will not be available if the ve-hicle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 261 On the rear lid handle: location of therear assist camera.

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driverduring reverse parking or manoeuvring››› Fig. 261. The camera image is viewed to-gether with orientation lines projected by thesystem on the Infotainment system screen.The bottom of the screen displays part of thebumper, which can be used by the driver as areference point.

Rear assist settingsRear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Park the vehicle in a safe place.● Apply the parking brake.● Switch the ignition on.

● If necessary, switch on the Infotainmentsystem.● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● Press the function button displayed onthe right of the image.● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-noeuvring with the rear assistThe system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, for example low visibility or dirtylens.● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-played very clearly or is incomplete.● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.● If the position and installation angle of thecamera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the systemTo familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assist in a place without »

293

Driving

too much traffic or in a car park when thereare good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lensKeep the camera lens clean and clear ofsnow and ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.● Remove snow using a small brush.● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lens. Doing socould damage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with therear assist

Fig. 262 Display on the Infotainment systemscreen: guidance lines.

Switching the system on and off● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-tion is on or the engine running, on engagingreverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-matic gearbox).● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)or removing the selector lever from the R po-sition (automatic gearbox). The system willalso disconnect immediately after the ignitionis switched off.

● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus››› page 286, the camera image will cease tobe transmitted immediately when reversegear is disengaged or when the selector leveris moved from the R position, and the opticalinformation provided by the Parking Aid sys-tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rearassist image can also be concealed:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle thatappears on the left of the screen (whichswitches to the full-screen mode of the Park-ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage reverse, or change the selectorlever's position, engage reverse again ormove the selector lever to position R.● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

1) WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) func-tion button will only be activated and availablewhen the reverse gear is engaged or the selectorlever is set to position R.

294

Towing bracket device

Meaning of the orientation lines››› Fig. 262

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (theapproximate width of the vehicle plus therear view mirrors) on the road surface.End of the side lines: the area marked ingreen ends approximately 2 m behind thevehicle on the road surface.Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi-mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the roadsurface.Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis-tance of approximately 40 cm at the rearof the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace and engage reverse gear (manualgearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-tion (automatic gearbox).● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side orientation lines lead towardsthe parking space.● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side orientation lines run parallel to it.

1

2

3

4


Towing bracket device*

Introduction

The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi-cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac-cessory, meets all the national technical andlegal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connectorfor the electrical connection between thetrailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-ped with a 7-pin connector you can use thecorresponding adaptor, which is available asa genuine SEAT accessory.

The maximum authorised towing load is 55kg.

WARNING● Before each journey, make sure that thedetachable ball joint is properly fitted andsecured in its housing.● If the detachable ball joint is not properlyfitted and secured, do not use it.● Do not use the towing bracket device fortowing if it is damaged or has missing parts.● Do not modify or adapt the towing deviceconnection.● Never unhook the detachable ball jointwhen the trailer is hitched.

CAUTIONHandle the detachable ball joint with carein order to avoid damaging the bumperpaintwork.

NoteTowing the vehicle with the detachable balljoint ››› page 89.

295

Driving

Description

Fig. 263 Towing bracket device support / de-tachable ball joint / key.

Depending on the country or version, thetowing bracket device's detachable ball jointis located:

● underneath the floor panel of the luggagecompartment.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

The towing device bracket is supplied with akey.

Key to ››› Fig. 26313-pin connectorSafety lugHook housingHook housing capBall protective coverDetachable ballLocking leverLock coverRelease boltLockLocking ballsKey

NoteContact an Authorised Service Partner ifyou lose your key.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Placing in standby position

Fig. 264 Step 1.

Fig. 265 Step 2.

Before assembling it, place the detachableball in the standby position with the followingtwo steps.

296


Step 1.● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un-til the part of the key with the holes reachesthe top position ››› Fig. 264 (arrow).

Step 2.● Grip the detachable ball below the protec-tive cover.● Press the release bolt B in the direction ofarrow 2 , and at the same time press lever Cin the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go››› Fig. 265.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Standby position

Fig. 266 Reserve position: position of the leverand the release bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly● Key A ››› Fig. 266 is in the released posi-tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-ing upwards).● Lever B ››› Fig. 266 is in the bottom posi-tion.● The release bolt C ››› Fig. 266 can bemoved.

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is readyfor installation.

CAUTIONThe key cannot be removed or turned in thestandby position.

Assembling the detachable ball -Step 1

Fig. 267 Fitting the detachable ball / Releasebolt in the deployed position.

Fitting the detachable ball● Remove the hook housing cap 4››› Fig. 263 downwards.● Set the detachable ball to its standby posi-tion ››› page 296.● Grip the detachable ball from below››› Fig. 267 and insert it into the hook housing »

297

Driving

following the direction of arrow 1 until it en-gages audibly ››› .

Lever A turns automatically in the directionof arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt Bmoves outwards (the red and green part willbe visible) ››› .

If lever A does not turn automatically or therelease bolt B does not come out, the de-tachable ball should be removed by turningthe lever as far as possible downwards fromthe housing cavity, and the detachable ball'ssupport surfaces and the cavity should thenbe cleaned.

WARNING● When attaching the detachable ball,keep your hands well away from the reachof the lever's rotation to avoid getting yourfingers caught.● Never try to pull the lever upwards byforce to turn the key. The detachable ballwould not be secured properly!

Assembling the detachable ball -Step 2

Fig. 268 Locking the lock.

Fig. 269 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step ››› page 297, As-sembling the detachable ball - Step 1!

● Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 untilthe part of the key with the holes reaches thebottom position ››› Fig. 268.

● Remove the key in the direction of arrow 2 .● Place cover B in the lock in the direction ofarrow 3 ››› Fig. 269 ››› .● Check that the detachable ball is securelyattached ››› page 299, Checking proper at-tachment.

CAUTION● After removing the key, always place thecover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-comes soiled it will be impossible to insertthe key.● Keep the towing bracket device's housingcavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-vent the detachable ball from being prop-erly secured!● If the detachable ball is removed, alwaysplace the cap on the hook's housing.

298


Checking proper attachment

Fig. 270 Detachable ball properly attached.

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,make sure that it is properly attached first.

Detachable ball properly attached.● The detachable ball will not fall out of thehousing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.● Lever A ››› Fig. 270 is fully raised.● The release bolt B ››› Fig. 270 is stickingfully out (the red and green part is visible).● The key has been removed.● Cover C ››› Fig. 270 is placed over thelock.

WARNING● When removing the detachable ball,keep your hands well away from the reachof the lever's rotation to avoid getting yourfingers caught.

● The towing bracket device should only beused if the detachable ball has been prop-erly locked!

Removing the detachable ball -Step 1

Fig. 271 Removing the lock cover.

Fig. 272 Releasing the lock.

● Remove cover A from the lock in the direc-tion of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 271.● Insert key B into the lock in the direction ofarrow 2 ››› Fig. 272.● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un-til the part of the key with the holes is facingupwards.

WARNINGNever remove the detachable ball jointwhen the trailer is hitched.

NoteBefore you remove the detachable ball,you are advised to place the protectivecover on the ball coupling.

299

Driving

Removing the detachable ball -Step 2

Fig. 273 Releasing the detachable ball.

Do not omit this first step ››› page 299, Re-moving the detachable ball - Step 1!

Releasing the detachable ball● Grip the detachable ball from below.● Press the release bolt A in the direction ofarrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the sametime press lever B in the direction of arrow2 as far as it will go.

In this position, the detachable ball is looseand will fall/drop freely downwards. If thisdoes not occur when you release it, press itwith the other hand from above.

The detachable ball locks into the standbyposition at the same time and is thereforeready to be reinserted into the hook housing››› .

● Fit the cap 4 ››› Fig. 263 onto its housing.

WARNINGNever leave the detachable ball loose inthe luggage compartment. It could causedamage in the luggage compartment in thecase of abrupt braking, and even jeopard-ise passenger safety!

CAUTION● If you hold the lever and do not pressdown on it as far as you can, after you re-move the detachable ball, the latter willcontinue upwards and will not lock into thestandby position. The detachable ballshould be placed in this position before thenext assembly.● Keep the detachable ball in the standbyposition, with the key inserted into the boxwhile you place it facing downwards withthe side opposite to the one where the keyis inserted. The key could get damaged!● When operating the lever, do not applytoo much pressure (for example, do notstand on it)!

NoteRemove any dirt from the detachable ballbefore you put it away with the vehicletools.

Operation and care

Put the cover on the housing cavity so thatdirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check theball coupling and apply suitable grease ifnecessary.

Use the protective cover when putting the de-tachable ball away to keep the luggagecompartment clean.

Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

CAUTIONThe top part of the hook housing isgreased. Make sure that the grease has notbeen removed.

Trailer towing

What do you need to bear in mindwhen towing a trailer?

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailerwhen fitted with the correct equipment.

If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con-sult ››› page 305.

300


ConnectorsYour vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connectorfor the electrical connection between thetrailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need touse an adapter cable. It is available at anyTechnical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar loadNever exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maximumpermitted trailer weight, you can then climbcorrespondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. With increasing altitude the enginepower and therefore the vehicle climbingability are impaired because of the reducedair density. The maximum trailer weight has tobe reduced accordingly. The weight of thevehicle and trailer combination must be re-duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (orpart thereof). The gross combination weightis the actual weight of the laden vehicle plusthe actual weight of the laden trailer. Whenpossible, operate the trailer with the maxi-mum permitted drawbar load on the balljoint of the towing bracket, but do not exceedthe specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbarloads that are given on the data plate of thetowing bracket are for certification purposes

only. The correct towing bracket figures foryour specific model, which may be lowerthan these figures, are given in the vehicledocumentation or on ››› page 346, Techni-cal specifications.

Distributing the loadDistribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible.Loads carried in the trailer must be securedto prevent them moving.

Tyre pressureThe maximum permissible tyre pressure val-ues are shown on the sticker on the rear partof the left front door frame. Set the tyre pres-sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with thetrailer manufacturer's recommendations.

Exterior mirrorsCheck whether you can see enough of theroad behind the trailer with the standard rearvision mirrors. If this is not the case, youshould have additional exterior mirrors fitted.Both exterior mirrors should be mounted onhinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrorsto give sufficient vision to the rear.

Tow ropeAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 301.

Trailer rear lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 301.

WARNINGNever transport people in a trailer. Thiscould result in fatal accidents.

Note● Towing a trailer places additional de-mands on the vehicle. We recommend ad-ditional services between the normal in-spection intervals if the vehicle is used fre-quently for towing a trailer.● Find out whether special regulations ap-ply to towing a trailer in your country.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 274 Diagram: assignment of the pins ofthe trailer's electrical socket. »

301

Driving

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 274:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pin 9

Electrical socket for trailerThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-tects that a trailer has been connected elec-trically, the electrical equipment on the trailerwill receive voltage through this connection.

Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, forexample, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 is

only powered when the engine is running. Thecharge wire (pin 10) charges, for example, acaravan battery.

Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected toeach other to avoid discharging or damagingthe vehicle's battery.

The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13, shouldnever be connected to each other to avoidoverloading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

Side lights (total) 100 Watts

Rear lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle electronicsmay be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle electronics may bedamaged.

● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Ball coupling of towing bracket de-vice*

The ball coupling is provided with instructionson fitting and removing the ball coupling ofthe towing bracket.

WARNINGThe towing bracket ball coupling must bestored securely in the luggage compart-ment to prevent them being flung throughthe vehicle and causing injury.

Note● By law, the ball coupling must be re-moved if a trailer is not being towed if it ob-scures the number plate.

302


Driving with a trailer

Fig. 275 Turn the 13-pin connector.

Before driving● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A andremove it in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 275.● Remove the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 263upwards.

After driving● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A andinsert it in the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 275.● Fit the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 263 onthe ball coupling.

Safety lugThe safety lug B ››› Fig. 275 is used to hookup the trailer's retainer cable.

On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retainercable should have slack in all the trailer po-sitions with respect to the vehicle (sharpbends, reverse gear, etc.).

HeadlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using theheadlight range adjuster ››› page 1431).

WARNING● Never use the safety lug to tow!● Adjust your speed to suit the road andtraffic conditions.● All work on the electrical system must becarried out only by specialised workshops.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of therear lights or any other power sources.● After hooking up the trailer and connect-ing the socket, check that all the trailer'srear lights are working properly.

Note● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,check the fuses in the instrument panelfuse box ››› page 50.● The contact between the retainer cableand the safety lug may give rise to me-chanical wear in the lug's surface protec-tion. This wear will not prevent the safetylug from operating properly or cause anyfault and is excluded from the warranty.● When connecting and disconnecting thetrailer, the towing vehicle's handbrakeshould be applied.

Anti-theft alarm

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered when the electrical connection be-tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm systembefore connecting or disconnecting a trailer››› page 133.

Conditions for the integration of a trailer inthe anti-theft alarm system.● The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an-ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracketdevice. »

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LEDxenon headlights.

303

Driving

● The trailer is connected electrically to thetowing vehicle by the trailer connector.● The electrical system of the vehicle and thetrailer are prepared for operation.● The vehicle is locked with the ignition keyand the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTIONFor technical reasons, trailers fitted withrear LED lights are not integrated in the an-ti-theft alarm system.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extracare.

Weight distributionThe weight distribution of a loaded trailer withan unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extraslowly to allow for the unbalanced weightdistribution.

SpeedThe stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-duced with increasing speed. For this reason,it is advisable not to drive at the maximumpermissible speed in an unfavourable road,weather or wind conditions. This applies es-pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediatelyif the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer hasan overrun brake, apply the brakes gently atfirst and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerk-ing that can be caused by locking of trailerwheels. Select a low gear in due course be-fore going down a steep downhill. This ena-bles you to use the engine braking to slowdown the vehicle.

ReheatingAt very high temperatures and during pro-longed slopes, driving in a low gear and highengine speed, always monitor the coolanttemperature gauge ››› page 114.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicleand trailer

The stabilisation of the towing vehicle andtrailer together is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is sway-ing, it intervenes automatically with the driversteering recommendation to reduce theswaying of the trailer.

Requirements for the stabilisation of thetowing vehicle and trailer● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with acompatible towing bracket.● The ESC and ASR are active. The controllamp or is not lit up on the instrumentcluster.● The trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer power sock-et.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).● The maximum vertical load technically per-missible is being utilised on the coupling de-vice.● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equippedwith a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced security provided by theelectric stability control of the towing vehi-cle and trailer should not lead you to takeany risks that could compromise your safe-ty.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.

304


● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

WARNINGThe electric stability control for the towingvehicle and trailer may not correctly de-tect all driving conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light and unstable trailers, so it maynot stabilise these correctly.● When driving on slippery surfaces withpoor grip, the trailer can even interfere withthe stability system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip even without having previously swayed.● If a trailer is not attached, but the trailerpower socket is connected (e.g. installationof a bicycle rack with lights), repeated au-tomatic braking may occur in extreme driv-ing conditions.

Retrofitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 276 Attachment points for towing bracket.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-hicle is purchased, this must be completedaccording to the instructions of the towingbracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracketA are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ballcoupling and the ground should never belower than the indicated value, even with afully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing brack-et:

B 65 mm (minimum)

C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehi-cle)

D 1,033 mm

E 322 mm

F 338 mm

Fitting a towing bracket● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effortfor the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a tow-ing bracket, please contact a Technical Serv-ice to check whether your cooling systemneeds modification.● The legal requirements in your countrymust be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-rate control lamp).● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rearbumper, must be removed and reinstalled.The towing bracket securing bolts must be »

305

Driving

tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-er socket must be connected to the vehicleelectrical system. This requires specialisedknowledge and tools.● Figures in the illustration show the elevationvalue and the attachment points which mustbe considered if you are retrofitting a towingbracket.

WARNINGThe towing brackets should be fitted at aspecialised workshop.● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-led, there is a serious danger of accident.● For your own safety, please observe thetow bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION● If the power socket is incorrectly instal-led, this could cause damage to the vehicleelectrical system.

Note● SEAT recommends that the towing hooksbe fitted at a specialised workshop. Con-sult your SEAT dealer in case additionalmodifications to your vehicle are necessa-ry.● Due to the specific design of the exhaust,the fitting of a conventional towing hook isnot recommended for some sportier ver-

sions. Please consult your Technical Serv-ice.

306

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Practical tips

Accessories and modifi-cations to the vehicle

Accessories and modifica-tions to the vehicle

Accessories, replacement of partsand modifications

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-ard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts,and before making technical changes to yourvehicle, we recommend that you consult yourTechnical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provideyou with the latest information about the use,legal requirements and recommendationsfrom the manufacturer regarding accessoriesand spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Ap-proved Accessories® and SEAT ApprovedSpare Parts®. This way, SEAT can guaranteethat the product in question is suitable, relia-ble and safe. SEAT Technical Services havethe necessary experience and facilities to en-

sure that parts are correctly and professio-nally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the mar-ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,safety and suitability of parts that SEAT hasnot approved. For this reason, SEAT cannotassume responsibility for any non-genuineparts used, even if these parts have been ap-proved by an official testing agency or arecovered by an official approval certificate.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect impact on the driver's control of the vehi-cle, such as a cruise control system or elec-tronically-controlled suspension, must be ap-proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle andbear the e mark (the European Union's au-thorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops orventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark(European Union manufacturer conformitydeclaration).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working range,of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-cording to our specifications. Unauthorisedmodifications to the electronic componentsor software in the vehicle may cause mal-functions. Due to the way the electronic com-ponents are linked together in networks, otherindirect systems may be affected by thefaults. This can seriously impair safety, leadto excessive wear of components, and alsoinvalidate your vehicle registration docu-ments.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held lia-ble for any damage caused by modificationsand/or work incorrectly performed. For thisreason, we recommend having all work per-formed by a SEAT Technical Service usingSEAT® Original Spare Parts.

WARNINGAny type of work or modification performedincorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and can cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and officeequipment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT »

307

Practical tips

generally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The aerial is installed correctly.● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle withouta properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields thatcould cause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

Checking and refilling lev-els

Refuelling

Refuelling


If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as thetank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond thispoint, as this will fill the expansion chamber.Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions arewarm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-bridsEvery 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-rol until the control lamp switches off andthen the tank must be refilled. This is neces-sary to ensure that the system works proper-ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-ing with petrol.

308

Checking and refilling levels

WARNING● Fuel is highly flammable and can causeserious burns and other injuries.– Never smoke or come into contact with

sparks when filling the fuel tank of thevehicle or a spare fuel canister withfuel. This is an explosion hazard.

– Follow legal requirements for the use ofspare fuel canisters.

– For safety reasons we do not recom-mend carrying a spare fuel canister inthe vehicle. The canister could be dam-aged in an accident and leak.

● If, in exceptional circumstances, youhave to carry a spare fuel canister, pleaseobserve the following:– Never fill the spare fuel canister inside

the vehicle or on it. An electrostaticcharge could build up during filling,causing the fuel fumes to ignite. Thiscould cause an explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth ofthe canister as far as possible.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapoursare explosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION● Fuel spills should be removed from thepaintwork immediately.● Never run the tank completely dry. Irreg-ular fuel supply can cause misfiring. As aresult, unburnt fuel could enter the catalyt-ic converter and cause damage.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine the ignition must be switched on forat least 30 seconds before starting the en-gine. Subsequently, when you start the en-gine it may take longer than normal to startfiring (up to one minute). This is due to thefact that the fuel system has to purge itselfof air before starting.

For the sake of the environmentDo not try to put in more fuel after the auto-matic filler nozzle has switched off, thismay cause the fuel to overflow if it be-comes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from special-ised personnel.

Refuelling with natural gas

Fig. 277 Open tank lid: gas filler mouth 1 , fill-er mouth retainer 2

Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition,mobile telephone and heating must beswitched off separately ››› .

Read the instructions on how to use the natu-ral gas pump carefully.

The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling withliquefied natural gas (LNG) ››› . Before refu-elling with natural gas, make sure you addthe appropriate type of fuel ››› page 312.

Opening the fuel tank capThe natural gas filler mouth is behind the fueltank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.

● Unlock the vehicle with the key or with thecentral locking button situated on the driv-er door ››› page 129. »

309

Practical tips

● Press on the rear area of the flap and openit.

RefuellingSpecial feature: If the ambient temperatureis very high, the natural gas pump protectionagainst overheating disconnects this auto-matically.

● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth››› Fig. 277 1 .● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gasfiller mouth.● The fuel tank will be full when the pumpcompressor automatically cuts the supply.● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

Closing the fuel tank cap● Check that the mouth retainer 2 of the gasfiller is not trapped with the filler. If necessary,place it in the filler mouth again.● Insert the plug in the filler mouth.● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear itclick into place.

WARNINGNatural gas is a highly explosive, easilyflammable substance. Incorrect handling

of the natural gas can cause accidents se-rious burns and other injuries.● Before refuelling with natural gas, en-gage the filling mouth correctly. If you cansmell gas, stop refuelling immediately.

WARNINGThe vehicle is not prepared to use liquefiednatural gas (LNG), and this fuel must not beadded under any circumstances. Liquefiednatural gas can cause the natural gas tankto explode, resulting in serious injury.

Note● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumpscan differ in the way they are operated. Ifyou do not know, ask a qualified employeeat the petrol station to do the refuelling.● Noises heard when refuelling are normaland do not indicate the presence of a faultin the system.● The vehicle natural gas system is pre-pared both for refuelling with a small com-pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-sor (fast refuel) in natural gas service sta-tions.

Fuel

Identification of the fuel1)

Fig. 278 Identification of fuels according toEuropean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified with different symbols.Depending on the fuel, the different symbolsare on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi-cle. The identification serves to prevent con-fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

1

2

1) Depending on country310


means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%.Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled(E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor-mation included in the corresponding stickerson the tank lid (examples):

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol ornormal 91 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91

3

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes atleastYou should use super 95 octane petrol (91AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception:vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 312,Ethanol fuel.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol withan octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher than theone required by the engine can be used.● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

311

Practical tips

Ethanol fuel3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with withthe marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run withunleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any highpercentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that ››› page 311, Type of pet-rol

NoteSEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de-crease impurities that using E100 ethanolfuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according tostandard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-tures, thus affecting the start or operation ofthe engine. To ensure that you can continueto use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold ingas stations is provided -depending on thestation- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em-ployee of the petrol station whether their die-sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suitedfor current and future temperatures.

CAUTION● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,heating oil, other fuels or thinning agentsas they can cause severely damage thefuel system and the engine.● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do notstart the engine under any circumstances.Risk of damaging the fuel system and theengine! Obtain technical assistance.

Natural gas3 Applies to vehicles: with a natural gas engine

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquidform, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)Vehicles with a natural gas engine must onlybe working with CNG (Compressed Natural

Gas CNG ), or with a mixture of biomethaneif it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.

Do not use fuels such as liquefied natural gas(Liquefied Natural Gas), liquified petroleumgas (LPG = Liquefied Petroleum G) or hy-thane (hydrogen mixed with methane) ››› .

Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas enginemust only be refuelled using compressednatural gas (CNG).

Natural gas quality and consumptionNatural gas is divided into the groups H and Ldepending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power andinferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide contentthan type L. The higher the heating power ofthe natural gas, the lower the consumptionwill be.

However, the heating power and the propor-tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc-tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve-hicle consumption can also vary when usinga single type of gas only.

The engine management automaticallyadapts to the natural gas used according toits quality. Therefore, different quality gasescan be mixed in the tank, without the need forcomprehensive draining before applying adifferent quality gas.

1) This motor is only available in some markets.312


Updated information relating to natural gasquality is displayed on the instrument panel››› page 108.

Natural gas and safetyIf you can smell gas or suspect that there is aleak ››› :

● Stop the vehicle immediately.● Switch the ignition off.● Open the doors to appropriately ventilatethe vehicle.● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.● Move away from the vehicle or switch offobjects that may cause sparks or a fire.● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-ue driving!● Seek specialist assistance. Have the faultrepaired.

Regular checks of the natural gas systemThe natural gas tanks may be damaged orcorroded by external factors. The walls of thegas tanks are weakened by deformations,damage or corrosion. As a result, the tankscould burst and result in serious injuries oreven death. For this reason, the vehicle ownermust have a specialised workshop check (vis-ual check) the gas system every 4 years atleast. The vehicle owner must have a speci-alised workshop replace the natural gastanks before they reach the end of their serv-

ice life. For further information about the serv-ice life of gas tanks, go to a SEAT dealer serv-ice or a specialised workshop

WARNINGFailure to act when you can smell gas in thevehicle or when refuelling can cause seri-ous injuries.● Carry out the necessary operations.● Leave the danger zone.● If necessary, warn the emergency serv-ices.

WARNINGThe vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),so LNG or LPG should not be used underany circumstances. Liquid gas can causean explosion of the natural gas tanks andcause severe injuries!

WARNINGDamaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-sult in serious injury or even death.● Have the natural gas deposits checked atleast every 4 years (visual check).● Natural gas tanks have a limited servicelife. Have the natural gas tanks replacedwhen required. You can obtain further infor-mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-alised workshops.

WARNINGIf the vehicle underbody touches theground or in the event of a rear collision,there could be damage to the natural gastanks.● Check whether there is a smell of gas.● If you notice a smell of gas, take the vehi-cle to a specialised workshop immediatelyand have the natural gas system checked.

NoteHave the natural gas system checked regu-larly by a specialised workshop, accordingto the Maintenance Programme.

AdBlue®

Information on AdBlue®


The consumption of AdBlue® depends onyour personal driving style, the temperatureof the system and on the outdoor tempera-ture when the vehicle is used. »

313

Practical tips

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11°C(+13°F). The system has heating elementsthat guarantee its operation even at low tem-peratures.

The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi-mately 10.4 litres.

The AdBlue® tank should never be empty.When the distance to empty drops below2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue® tankwill appear on the dash panel display››› page 314. If this information is ignored, lat-er on it will not be possible to re-start the en-gine. If this warning does not appear, it is notnecessary to refill the AdBlue® tank.

AdBlue® is a registered brand of the GermanAssociation of the Automotive Industry (VDA)and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (DieselExhaust Fluid).

CAUTIONFilling the AdBlue® tank excessively cancause damage to the tank.

Refilling AdBlue®

Fig. 280 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refillingPark the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi-cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, thelevel indicator may not detect the load prop-erly.

If a warning message about AdBlue® levelsappears on the dash panel display, fill atleast the minimum amount required (ap-prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amountwill the system detect that AdBlue® has beenadded and you will be able to start the en-gine again. The maximum amount that canbe refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is notswitched off during refilling, the warning to re-fill may continue to appear on the instrumentpanel display.

Fill with a refill bottleOnly use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 280.● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-ti-clockwise direction.● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-tions, indicated on the refill bottle.● Check the expiry date.● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fillerneck vertically and screw the bottle on byhand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.● Press the refill bottle in the direction of thefiller neck and hold it in this position.● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Donot compress or break the bottle!● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-rection and gently pull it upwards ››› .● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquidcomes out of the bottle.● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-tion until it is tightly closed.● Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-nition.

314


● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-onds for the system to detect the fluid load.● Make sure you wait for at least 30 secondsbefore starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlueValid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-duction.

● Open the tank cap.● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise››› Fig. 280.● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for thefirst time.● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

WARNINGAdBlue® should only be stored in the origi-nal container, which should be tightlyclosed and kept in a safe place.● Never keep AdBlue® in empty food con-tainers, bottles or other similar containers.Other people may confuse it for otherproducts.● Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of chil-dren.

CAUTION● When refilling, the nozzle grip should bealigned downward. Otherwise the nozzlewill not connect automatically.● Do not try to add any more additive afterthe nozzle has stopped for the first time.The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBluecould spill out.● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-ditives. Any type of damage caused bysuch a mixture will not be covered by thewarranty.● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank.This could result in engine damage.● Do not carry the refill bottle inside thevehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-ture changes or damage to the bottle), theAdBlue® may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of the refill bottle in an environ-ment-friendly manner.

NoteYou can buy refill bottles that are adequatefor AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships.

Working in the engine com-partment

Safety notes for work in the enginecompartment


Before starting any work on the engine or inthe engine compartment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the se-lector lever to position P, depending on thecase.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 17.

You should not do any work in the enginecompartment unless you know exactly howto carry out the jobs and have the correcttools! Have the work carried out by a special-ised workshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool-ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, areunder constant development. SEAT providesa constant flow of information to Technical »

315

Practical tips

Services concerning modifications. For thisreason, we recommend you have service flu-ids and consumables replaced by a Techni-cal Service. Please observe the relevant in-structions ››› page 307. The engine compart-ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area ››› .

WARNINGAll work on the engine or in the engine com-partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids,involves the danger of injury and burns, ac-cidents and even fire.● Never open the bonnet if you see steam,smoke or coolant escaping from the enginecompartment. Otherwise, there is a risk ofsustaining burns. Wait until no more steamor coolant is emitted, then allow the engineto cool before carefully opening the bon-net.● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.● Apply the handbrake and move the gearlever to neutral or selector lever to positionP.● Keep children away from the vehicle.● Never touch hot engine parts. There is arisk of burns.● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on ahot exhaust gas system. This is a fire haz-ard.● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-trical system, particularly at the points

where the jump leads are attached››› page 59. The battery could explode.● Never touch the radiator fan. It is temper-ature controlled and could start automati-cally, even when the engine has beenswitched off and the key removed from theignition!● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Ifthe coolant is hot, the cooling system willbe pressurised!● Protect face, hands and arms by cover-ing the cap with a large, thick cloth to pro-tect against escaping coolant and steam.● Always make sure you have not left anyobjects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, inthe engine compartment.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient forsecuring the vehicle and there is a risk ofinjury.● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine running,there is an additional, potentially fatal,safety risk from the rotating parts, such asthe drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,and from the high-voltage ignition system.You should also observe the following:

– Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.

– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothingand long hair do not get trapped in ro-tating engine parts. Danger of death.Before starting any work remove jewel-lery, tie back and cover hair, and weartight-fitting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even ifthe handbrake is applied. Danger ofdeath.

● If work has to be carried out on the fuelsystem or on electrical components, youmust observe the following safety notes inaddition to the above warnings:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network. The vehicle must beunlocked when this is done, otherwisethe alarm will be triggered.

– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always have a fire extinguisher on

hand.

WARNINGIf the bonnet is not correctly closed, itcould suddenly open while driving leavingthe driver without visibility. This could re-sult in a serious accident.

316


● After closing the bonnet, always checkthat it is properly secured by the lockingmechanism in the lock carrier piece. Thebonnet must be flush with the surroundingbody panels.● While driving, if you notice that the bon-net is not correctly closed then stop imme-diately and close it correctly.

● Only open and close the bonnet whenthere is nobody within its range.

CAUTIONWhen topping up service fluids, make surenot to mistake them. Using the wrong fluidscould cause serious malfunctions and en-gine damage!

For the sake of the environmentService fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-ronment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in aspecialised workshop.

Checking levels

Fig. 281 Diagram for the location of the various el-ements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tankEngine oil level dipstickEngine oil filler capBrake fluid reservoir

1

2

3

4

Vehicle batteryWindscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids arecarried out on the components mentioned »

5

6

317

Practical tips

above. These operations are described in››› page 315.

OverviewYou will find further explanations, instructionsand restrictions on the technical specifica-tions as of ››› page 346.

NoteThe layout of parts may vary depending onthe engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change indicatedin the Maintenance Programme, be per-formed by a technical service or specialisedworkshop.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correct en-gine oil for your vehicle at your specialisedshop. If you have to change your engine oil,use that oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canadd oil once up to a maximum of 0.5 L of thenext oil until the next oil change:

● Valid for vehicles with petrol engines:standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00,VW 508 00, ACEA C or API SN.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 319 andyou cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil(once) conforming to the specificationsVW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)››› page 47.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not continue driving!Engine oil pressure too low.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom-panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add moreoil ››› page 319.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil levelis correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine atidle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Top up the oil at the next opportunity ››› page 319.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to havethe system inspected. Until then it is advisable tocheck the oil level every time you refuel.

318


Checking engine oil level

Fig. 282 Engine oil dipstick.


Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until theoperating temperature is reached and thenstop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out again and check the oil lev-el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil

consumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 315.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 282 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil


Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Safety notes for workin the engine compartment on page 315.

The position of the filler neck is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment image››› page 317.

Engine oil specification ››› page 47.

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 282 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 282 A . Otherwise oil can be drawnin through the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

Changing engine oil


The engine oil must be changed at the inter-vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in theMaintenance Programme. »

319

Practical tips

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 315, Safetynotes for work in the engine compartment.● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oilmust be stored in a safe place out of thereach of children.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such addi-tives would not be covered by the factorywarranty.

For the sake of the environment● Because of disposal problems and thespecial tools and specialist knowledge re-

quired, we recommend that you have theengine oil and filter changed by a Techni-cal Service.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough to holdall the engine oil.

Cooling system

Topping up coolant


Top up coolant when the level is below theMIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks.When the engine is hot, it may be slightlyabove the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professionalassistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expansiontank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates aleak in the cooling system. Take the vehiclestraight to a specialised workshop to havethe cooling system examined. If there are noleaks in the engine cooling system, a loss ofcoolant can only occur if the coolant boilsand is forced out of the system as a result ofoverheating.

WARNING● If your vehicle is immobilised for techni-cal reasons, move it to a safe distance fromtraffic. Switch off the engine, switch on theblinkers and place the emergency trian-gles.● Never open the bonnet if you see steam,smoke or coolant escaping from the engine

320


compartment, there is a risk of burns. Waituntil you can no longer see or hear escap-ing steam or coolant.● The engine compartment is a dangerousarea. Before carrying out any work in theengine compartment, switch off the engineand allow it to cool down. Always note thecorresponding warnings ››› page 315.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be ahealth hazard. Therefore, the antifreezeshould be stored in the original container ina safe place out of reach of children. Fail-ure to comply could result in poisoning.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail lead-ing to serious damage.● Please make sure that the percentage ofadditive is correct with respect to the low-

est expected ambient temperature in thezone in which the vehicle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised. In this case, theheating would not work either and inade-quately dressed passengers could die ofcold.

CAUTIONDo not top up the expansion tank with cool-ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter thecooling system. In this case, stop driving.Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise,there is a risk of engine damage.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the riskof causing severe damage to the engineand the engine cooling system.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G13 additive has been mixedwith an inadequate coolant. The coolantmust be changed as soon as possible if thisis the case! This could result in seriousfaults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level


The position of the brake fluid reservoir isshown in the corresponding engine compart-ment image ››› page 317. The brake fluid res-ervoir has a black and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when thevehicle is being used as the brake pads areautomatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes down noticeably ina short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,there may be a leak in the brake system. Adisplay on the instrument panel will warn youif the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 118.

WARNINGBefore opening the bonnet to check thebrake fluid level, read and observe thewarnings ››› page 315.

321

Practical tips

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicatesbrake fluid change intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

Before opening the bonnet, please read andfollow the warnings ››› in Safety notes forwork in the engine compartment onpage 315 in section “Safety notes for workingin the engine compartment”.

In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hy-groscopic and absorbs water from the ambi-ent air. If the water content in the brake fluid istoo high, the brake system could corrode.This also considerably reduces the boilingpoint of the brake fluid. Heavy use of thebrakes may then cause a vapour lock whichcould impair the braking effect.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.Only use brake fluid that expressly meets theVW 501 14 standard.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid ina SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service.If none is available, use only high-qualitybrake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT4.

Using any other kind of brake fluid or one thatis not of a high quality may affect operationof the brake system and reduce its effective-

ness. Never use a brake fluid if the containerdoes not state that it complies with VW 50114, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USAstandards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNINGBrake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-pairs the braking effect.● Before opening the bonnet to check thebrake fluid level, read and observe thewarnings ››› page 315.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. There is a toxic risk.● Perform the brake fluid change accord-ing to the Maintenance Programme. Heavyuse of the brakes may cause a vapour lockif the brake fluid is left in the brake systemfor too long. This would seriously affect theeffectiveness of the brakes and the safetyof the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTIONBrake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintworkimmediately.

For the sake of the environmentThe brake pads and brake fluid must becollected and disposed of according theapplicable regulations. The SEAT TechnicalService network has the necessary equip-

ment and qualified personnel for collectingand disposing of this waste material.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind-screen washer reservoir water


The windscreen washer is supplied with liq-uid from the windscreen washer reservoir inthe engine compartment. It has a capacity ofapproximately 3 litres.

The tank is in the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid. Approved windscreen cleaningproducts exist on the market with high deter-gent and anti-freeze properties, these maybe added all-year-round. Please follow thedilution instructions on the packaging.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.

322


● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 315.

CAUTION● Never put radiator anti-freeze or otheradditives into the windscreen washer fluid.● Always use approved windscreen cleans-ing products diluted as per instructions. Ifyou use other washer fluids or soap solu-tions, the tiny holes in the fan-shaped noz-zles could become blocked.

Vehicle battery

Symbols and warnings on handlingthe battery


Wear eye protection

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is releasedwhen the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injuryand chemical burns as well as the risk ofaccident or fire when working on the bat-tery and the electrical system:● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Rinse battery acid from eyes immediatelyfor several minutes with clear water. Thenseek medical care immediately. Neutraliseany acid splashes on the skin or clothingwith a soapy solution, and rinse off withplenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mis-take, consult a doctor immediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and bat-teries.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignition

and all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-locking the vehicle before you disconnectthe battery! The alarm will otherwise betriggered.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices beforereconnecting the battery. Reconnect firstthe positive cable and then the negativecable. Never reverse the polarity of theconnections. This could cause an electricalfire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flatbattery can also freeze at temperaturesclose to 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Never disconnect the battery if the igni-tion is switched on or if the engine is »

323

Practical tips

running. This could damage the electricalsystem or electronic components.● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It should go out when the enginehas started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolytelevel

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

– Open the bonnet and open the batterycover at the front ››› in Safety notes forwork in the engine compartment onpage 316 ››› in Symbols and warningson handling the battery on page 323. Forvehicles with the battery under the sparewheel, open the rear lid and lift the floorcovering. The battery is located next to thespare wheel.

– Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.

– If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment diagram››› page 317.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the topof the battery changes colour, depending onthe charge state and electrolyte level of thebattery.

There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.

● Transparent/light yellow: the battery mustbe replaced. Contact a specialised work-shop.

Charging or changing the battery

The battery is maintenance-free and ischecked during the inspection service. Allwork on the vehicle battery requires specialistknowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the batteryshould be checked by a specialised work-shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled environ-ment.

324

Wheels

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-nance, performance and safety specifica-tions of your vehicle.

WARNING● We recommend you use only mainte-nance-free or cycle free leak-proof batter-ies which comply with standards T 825 06and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of2001 August or later.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in Symbols and warnings on handlingthe battery on page 323.

For the sake of the environmentBatteries contain toxic substances such assulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis-posed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

New tyresNew tyres do not give maximum grip straightaway and should therefore be “run in” bydriving carefully and at moderate speeds forabout the first 500 km (300 miles). This willalso increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres, compared to other rim andtyre combinations, offer a broader tread anda greater rim diameter along with a lowerheight of the tyre sidewall. This results in amore agile driving behaviour. However, onroads that are in poor condition, this might af-fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres, for instance due tostrong knocks, potholes, manhole covers andkerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyrepressure is particularly important››› page 326.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks onthe tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks onthe rims. »

325

Practical tips

If the rims and tyres have received a heavyimpact or have been damaged, have themchecked and, if required, replaced at a speci-alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This guaranteesoptimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-ing the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. Thismay cause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stopthe vehicle immediately and check thetyres for damage.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Fig. 283 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

The maximum tyre pressure values are shownon a sticker stuck to the back of the left frontdoor frame ››› Fig. 283.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressurefrom the sticker. The values refer to Sum-mer tyres.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. The slightly raisedpressures of warm tyres must not be re-duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you arecarrying.

Tyre pressureThe correct tyre pressure is especially impor-tant at high speeds. The pressure shouldtherefore be checked at least once a monthand before starting a journey.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). Whendriving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-sumption may increase slightly.

WARNINGA tyre can easily burst if the pressure is toolow, causing an accident!● At continuously high speeds, a tyre withinsufficient pressure flexes more. In thisway it becomes too hot, and this can causetread separation and tyre blow-out. Alwaysobserve the recommended tyre pressures.

326

Wheels

● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,the tyres will wear prematurely and the ve-hicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Service life of tyres

Fig. 284 Tyre tread wear indicators.

Fig. 285 Diagram for changing wheels.

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyrepressure, driving style and fitting.

Wear indicatorsThe original tyres on your vehicle have1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”››› Fig. 284, running across the tread. De-pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 ofthem evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark-ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let-ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po-sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm(measured in the tread grooves next to thetread wear indicators). Worn tyres must bereplaced. Different figures may apply in ex-port countries ››› .

Tyre pressureIncorrect tyre pressure causes prematurewear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this

reason, the tyre pressure should be checkedat least once per month ››› page 326.

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels aroundIf the front tyres are worn considerably morethan the rear ones it is advisable to changethem around as shown ››› Fig. 285. The usefullife of all the tyres will then be about thesame time.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, various factors encountered in nor-mal driving can cause them to become un-balanced, which results in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, youshould have the wheel alignment checked bya Technical Service. »

327

Practical tips

WARNINGThere is a serious danger of accidents if atyre bursts during driving!● The tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread wear indicators are worn››› page 327. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident. Worn tyresdo not grip well at high speeds on wetroads. There is also a greater risk of “aqua-planing”.● At continuously high speeds, a tyre withinsufficient pressure flexes more. This cau-ses it to overheat. This can cause treadseparation and tyre blow-out. Risk of acci-dent. Always observe the recommendedtyre pressures.● If tyres show excessive wear, you shouldhave the running gear checked by a Tech-nical Service.● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel andbrake fluid away from tyres.● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately!

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essentialpart of the vehicle's design. Those approvedby SEAT are specially matched to the char-acteristics of the vehicle and make a majorcontribution to good road-holding and safehandling ››› .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs andnot individually (i.e. both front tyres or bothrear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des-ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa-tions marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/55 R16 91VThis contains the following information:

Tyre width in mmHeight/width ratio in %Tyre construction: RadialRim diameter in inchesLoad rating codeSpeed rating

The tyres could also have the following infor-mation:

● A direction of rotation symbol● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outerside of the wheel).

19555R1691V

“DOT ... 1116...” means, for example, that thetyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016.

We recommend that work on tyres andwheels be carried out by a Technical Service.They are familiar with the procedure andhave the necessary special tools and spareparts as well as the proper facilities for dis-posing of the old tyres.

Any technical service has full information onthe technical requirements when installing orchanging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

WARNING● We recommend that you use only wheelsand tyres which have been approved bySEAT for your model. Failure to do so couldimpair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres thatare more than 6 years old. If you have noalternative, you should drive slowly andwith extra care at all times.● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known “history of use”.● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you mustensure that the flow of air to the brakes isnot restricted. This could cause the brakesystem to overheat.● All four wheels must be fitted with radialtyres of the same type, size (rolling circum-ference) and the same tread pattern.

328

Wheels

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-ted to find out whether wheels or tyres ofdifferent sizes to those originally fitted bySEAT can be fitted, and to find out aboutthe combinations allowed between thefront axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).● For technical reasons, it is not generallypossible to use the wheels from other vehi-cles. This can also apply to wheels of thesame model. The use of wheels or tyreswhich have not been approved by SEAT foruse with your model may invalidate the ve-hicle's type approval for use on publicroads.● If the spare tyre is not the same as thetyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.winter tyres) you should only use the sparetyre for a short period of time and drive withextra care. Refit the normal road wheel assoon as possible.

Wheel bolts

The design of wheel bolts is matched to therims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the cor-rect wheel bolts with the right length and cor-rectly shaped bolt heads must be used. This

ensures that wheels are fitted securely andthat the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not usewheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if itis the same model ››› page 307.

WARNINGIf the wheel bolts are not tightened cor-rectly, the wheel could become loose whiledriving. Risk of accident.● The wheel bolts must be clean and turneasily. Never apply grease or oil to them.● Use only wheel bolts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheelbolts is too low, they could loosen whilstthe vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! Ifthe tightening torque is too high, the wheelbolts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONThe prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Tyre monitoring indicator*

Fig. 286 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-tem button.

Control lamp

It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than thevalue set by the driver ››› .

Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.

The tyre pressure loss indicator compares therevolutions and thus the wheel diameter ofeach wheel using the ESC. If the wheel diam-eter of a wheel changes, the control indicatorof the tyres informs of this fact . The wheeldiameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload. »

329

Practical tips

● The wheels of one axle are under morepressure (for example, driving with a trailer oron steep slopes).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustmentAfter modifying tyre pressure or changing anywheels, the new tyre pressure must be storedin the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS function button››› page 34.

In vehicles without a radio, press and holddown the ››› Fig. 286 button, with theignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),the tyre pressure must be increased to therecommended value for a full load (see thesticker on the back of the left front doorframe). If the tyre monitor system button ispressed down, the new tyre pressures areconfirmed.

WARNING● When the tyre pressure control lamplights up, reduce speed immediately andavoid any sudden turning or braking ma-noeuvre. Stop when possible, and checkthe tyre pressure and status.

● The driver is responsible for maintainingcorrect tyre pressures. For this reason, tyrepressure must be regularly checked.● Under certain circumstances (e.g. whendriving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-tions or on a dirt track) the tyre controllamp may light up belatedly or may func-tion incorrectly.

NoteIf the battery is disconnected, the yellowwarning lamp lights up after turning theignition on. This should turn off after a briefjourney.

Spare wheel (temporaryspare wheel)*

Location and use of the temporaryspare wheel

Fig. 287 In the boot: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheelIf you ever have a punctured tyre or loss ofpressure, the temporary spare wheel is onlyintended for temporary use until you reach aworkshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soonas possible.

Please note the following restrictions whenusing the temporary spare wheel. This

330

Wheels

temporary spare wheel has been speciallydesigned for your vehicle, thus, it cannot bechanged with the temporary spare wheelfrom another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tem-porary spare wheel rim.

Snow chainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace thepunctured front wheel with this wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicleswith the Beats Audio® sound system (6speakers with 1 subwoofer)*Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel(carpet) as follows:

● Pull the carpet upwards to remove it.● Disconnect the cable for the subwooferspeaker ››› Fig. 287 1 .● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.

● When replacing the spare wheel, place thesubwoofer speaker in the direction indicatedby the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac-ing forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so that thesubwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

Removing the 16” temporary spare wheel(without subwoofer)● Remove the luggage compartment varia-ble floor to access the wheel and the tools››› page 158.● Loosen the strap that secures the box bypressing on the buckle.● Remove the toolbox.● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise andremove it.● Press the thread and turn it 90° clockwiseor anti-clockwise and remove it.● Pull on the front part of the spare wheel toremove it.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the backof the left front door frame.

● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.

Winter service

Winter tyres

In winter conditions winter tyres will consider-ably improve the vehicle's handling. The de-sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressureof 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than thepressures specified for summer tyres (see thesticker on the back of the left front doorframe).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizescan be found in the vehicle's registration doc-umentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All »

331

Practical tips

tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentationalso apply to winter tyres.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when thetread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code ››› page 328, Newtyres and wheels determines the followingspeed limits for winter tyres: ›››

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

In some countries, vehicles which can exceedthe speed rating of the fitted tyre must havean appropriate sticker in the driver's field ofview. These stickers are available from yourtechnical service. The legal requirements ofeach country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyreshandle better when the roads are free ofsnow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to thenotes on the spare wheel ››› page 328, Newtyres and wheels.

WARNINGThe maximum speed for the winter tyresmust not be exceeded. Otherwise, thiscould lead to damage and risk of accident.

QSTH

For the sake of the environmentFit your summer tyres again as soon aspossible. They are quieter, do not wear soquickly and reduce fuel consumption.

332

Service

Maintenance

Service

Service intervals

Servicing and Digital MaintenancePlan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop records Service receipts in a centralsystem. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-mentation of the service history, it is possibleto reproduce the services performed anytime. SEAT recommends requesting a Servicereceipt after every service carried out con-taining all the services carried out on the sys-tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt isreplaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-able in some markets. In this case, yourSEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-rent documentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEATauthorised service or specialised workshopdocuments the following information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the nearfuture.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information is docu-mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe in-juries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carriedout by a SEAT authorised service or speci-alised workshop.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with SEATguidelines.

Fixed Service or Flexible Service

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below: »

333

Maintenance

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 46.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 46.

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However,a fixed service may affect service costsThe Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals displayAt SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-ted by the service interval display on the in-strument panel ››› page 115 or in the Vehi-cle settings menu of the infotainment sys-tem ››› page 34. The service interval dis-play gives information for service dates thatinvolve an engine oil change or an inspection.When the time for the corresponding servicecomes, additional work required, such as thechange of brake fluid and the spark plugs,can be carried out.

Information on the conditions ofuse

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-verse conditions of use, some of the workmust be carried out before the next serviceperiod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about theneed of performing service work between

334

Service

normal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Have the services conducted at author-ised SEAT services or specialised work-shops.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (depending onthe conditions of use and the features ofthe vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, oroperating fluids). Maintenance services aredivided into inspection and review services.Consult the details of the jobs required foryour vehicle at:

● Your SEAT authorised service● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your SEAT authorised service orspecialised workshop is always receiving up-dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the manu-facturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. For thisreason, we always recommend the use ofOriginal SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additionalservice to you, offering the possibility of re-placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT OriginalAccessories and SEAT approved accessoriesfor your vehicle. The reliability, safety andsuitability of these accessories have been in-spected specifically for this type of vehicle.SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety andsuitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEATService Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEATvehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefitsand coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long asyou carry out the recommended Inspectionand Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-ised Service. »

335

Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT MobilityService differs depending on the country inwhich the vehicle was purchased. For furtherinformation ask your SEAT dealership or theSEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfectcondition of new vehicles. Check the pur-chase agreement or complementary addi-tional documentation provided by your Tech-nical Service to see the conditions and theterms of the warranty. Consult further infor-mation in this regard in your SEAT OfficialService.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic considerations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safeplace, out of the reach of children. Dangerof poisoning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resinor anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, themore damage it can cause to the surface.High temperatures, for instance strong sun-light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, birddroppings or tree resin, use a lot of water anda microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleanersWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thedistance between the spraying water. Do notaim the jet directly to the side window gas-kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner.

336

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car wash tunnelsSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreenwipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-structions of the car wash tunnel operator,especially if your vehicle has detachableparts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-ployed electrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checked inthe following tables. The contents should beunderstood merely as a recommendation. Goto your specialised workshop if you have »

337

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.Take he general considerations into account››› in Take special care with... onpage 341.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean-ing product which does notcontain solventsCamera lenses - soft cloth withcleaning product with no alco-hol content

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spraywith no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaningproduct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if asteel cleaning product is re-quired


Paint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paintCheck the paint's colour codein an authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and thenapply hard wax. Go you yourspecialised workshop if youhave any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work-shop take care of this

The water doesnot create drop-lets on the cleanpaint

Maintain with hard wax (atleast 2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative after-wards if the wax used does notcontain preservative ingredi-ents

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, birddroppings, treesap, road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt,e.g. cosmeticproducts orsunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-ted parts ››› page 336

338

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos-sible solvent-free plastic clean-er


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-lowed to dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Dirt particles ad-hered to the sur-face

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved greaseand paint particles drying withan absorbent cloth, in case youmust treat it with water after-wards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry withan absorbent cloth, if applica-ble, apply neutral soap solutionafterwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand leather cleanerDry stains: grease dissolvingspray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable forleather »

339

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches, the scraper should only bepushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damaging thepaint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ofscratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question.

340

Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantaraleather with leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removersor similar products.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,spot removers or similar products on leather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight forlong periods, otherwise it may tend to losesome of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best tocover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditionssuch as humid weather, darkness or whenthe sun is in its lowest point, visibility maybe impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-ings can also cause the windscreen wiperblades to make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 323.

341

Information for the user



Event Data Recorder

Description and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. These da-ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupants werewearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as whether

the systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency braking assistance system(Front Assist).● Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident inves-tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) thevehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unlessthe owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lesseeor hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, SEAT may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Recycling of electrical or electron-ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehicle mustbe marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

342


Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-clare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declarationis available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you toassociate the name of the device in the dec-laration of compliance with the features ofthe vehicle and the terminology used in theon-board documentation.

Features of thevehicle

Name of the deviceaccording to the dec-laration of compli-ance

Radiofrequency re-mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,FS94



Radio frequency re-mote control (auxili-ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474



Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-ternal antenna of thecar

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated indashboard moduleinstrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Bigfamily

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG720166002

8S7.035.503.B »343




Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.2256F9.035.2253V5.035.577.A7N0.035.552.J7N0.035.552.K7N0.035.552.Q5F4.035.2255F4.035.225.A5F4.035.225.B5F9.035.2255F9.035.225.A5F9.035.225.B575.035.225575.035.225.A575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-nents that, due to their size or nature, cannotinclude a sticker are listed below, as long as itis legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt,GERMANY

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxiliaryheater)

Digades gmbHÄußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 982205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg,GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

344


Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Auxiliary heating868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

Bluethooth2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and AlhambraGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

345

Technical data

Technical data

Technical specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-ferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the technical speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die-sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.


Fig. 288 Chassis number.

Chassis numberThe VIN is located in the Easy Connect andunder the windscreen, on the driver side

››› Fig. 288. Additionally, the chassis numberis located in the engine compartment, on theright-hand side. The number is engraved onthe top side rail, and is partially covered.

VIN in the Easy Connect● Select: / button > function buttonSETTINGS > Service > Chassis number.

Identification plateThe identification plate is located on the rearpillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles forcertain export countries do not have an iden-tification plate.

Identifying lettersThe identifying letters of the engine can beviewed on the instrument panel when the en-gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

● Hold down the button on the dashpanel for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel con-sumption

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to the

346


legislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each indi-vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-mental conditions, load or number of passen-gers.

NoteIn practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values candiffer from those calculated in the currentEuropean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes 75kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittingsor retro-fitting accessories will increase theweight of the vehicle ››› .

WARNING● Please note that the centre of gravitymay shift when transporting heavy objects;this may affect vehicle handling and leadto an accident. Always adjust your speedand driving style to suit road conditionsand requirements.● Never exceed the gross axle weight rat-ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If thepermissible axle load or the permissible to-tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac-teristics of the vehicle may change, leadingto accidents, injuries and damage to thevehicle.

Trailer mode

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50mph) (in certain circumstances up to100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif-ferent in other countries. All data in the officialvehicle documentation takes precedenceover these data at all times ››› .

Drawbar loadsThe maximum permitted drawbar load on theball coupling of the towing bracket must notexceed 55 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor, if the drawbarload is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING● For safety reasons, you should not driveat speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) whentowing a trailer. This also applies in coun-tries where higher speeds are permitted.● Never exceed the maximum trailerweights or the drawbar load. If the permis-sible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving character-istics of the vehicle may change, leading toaccidents, injuries and damage to the vehi-cle.

347

Technical data

Wheels

Tyre pressure and wheel bolts

Tyre pressureThe sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the back of the left front doorframe. The tyre pressure values given thereare for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightlyraised pressures of warm tyres ››› .

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higherthan that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

Wheel boltsAfter the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is veryimportant. If the tyre pressure is too high ortoo low, there is an increased danger of ac-cidents - particularly at high speeds.● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If thetightening torque is too high, the wheelbolts and threads can be damaged.

NoteWe recommend that you ask your Techni-cal Service for information about appropri-ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

348


Engine data

Petrol engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 85 (115)/5,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/2,000-3,500 200/2,000-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 173 (IV) 182 (V) 182 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 6.6 6.7


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,615-1,700a) 1,625-1,710a) 1,655-1,740a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,180 1,189 1,212

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850 860 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 590 600

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,200 1,200


a) Varies depending on the features.b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

349

Technical data

Petrol engines

1.5 TSI Evo Start-Stop 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800


No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,598

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 205 (V) 181 (IV) 181 (IV)











350


Natural gas/petrol engines

1.0 TGI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 66 (90)/4,500-5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,900-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999

FuelCNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual

Top speed (km/h) 169 (4)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,301

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) a)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) a)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) a)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) a)

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

351

Technical data

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/2,750-4,600 85 (115)/3,250-4,000


No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,598

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG manual

Top speed (km/h) 172 (5) 174 (6) 185 (5)











352


Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 289 Dimensions and angles. »

353

Technical data

››› Fig. 289 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,503

F Backa) track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,552b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5°

Turning radius (m) 11.0

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.b) Dimension to the roof bars.

354

Index

IndexAABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 259

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266function for preventing overtaking in an in-

side lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265instructions on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

AdBlueinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

AdjustVehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Adjustingfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 149seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Adjusting the front seatsadjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Adjusting the head restraintsfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Adjustment

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 74

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 76functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 77side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 77

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Air recirculation

air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Alcantara leather: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Anchoring

the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 228, 229Anti-locking system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 85Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 85

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250emergency braking assistance (Front As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

355

Index

parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269parking system Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Audible warning signal

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . 40selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . 236tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 236

Automatic transmissioncontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272indication in the external rear view mirror . . 270malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Bluetooth®connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 321

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 243Brakes

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321new Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 231Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Braking

brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223BSD

see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Bulbs

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

CCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Central locking

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . 129central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128self-locking system to prevent involuntary

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Changing bulbsadditional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95DRL (daytime running light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

356

Index

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 82Child seats

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 81securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Cleaning

Alcantara leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 340control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

sensors/camera lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 339washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168fan regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Clocksanalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111set time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Communication between the Infotainment

system and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187WLAN point of access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118ABS anti-blocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

357

Index

Control lampsengine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113refuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Controls and displaysgeneral instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 136Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Coolant

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Coolant temperature

safety recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Cooling system

checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Cylinder deactivation

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . 106

DDangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 22

Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Detachable ball

assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 298checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Dieselparticulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Diesel fuelparticulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Digital instrumentpanel (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Digital SEAT Cockpitnavigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Display indications

compass indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107driving recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252status of active cylinder management

(ACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Disposalbelt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Distance controlsee Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Doors

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 64, 65, 66Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Drivingdriving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 247driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 303, 304with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Driving abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 229358

Index

EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 136

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 138Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . 226, 228, 229

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 219Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 228Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . 231Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

automatic gearbox emergency program . 240bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 58emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Emergency braking assistance systemindications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Emission control system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Engine and ignitionautomatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 222stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Engine breakdownControl lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 350Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 318

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 318topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Enlargingthe luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Environmentenvironmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243environmentally-friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . 244

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

359

Index

Exhaust filtering systemcatalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Exhaust purification system for vehicles withdiesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . 283Exterior lighting

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

FFabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Faulty bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Fog

lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 142Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 142

Frequency bandAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Front Assistindications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front seatsmanual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 310consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 246

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 91fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

GGear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . 232kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . 236General

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104General instrument panel

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . 140

General overview of the engine compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

360

Index

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 143HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . 71Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Headlightsdriving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165demisting the windscreen and side win-

dows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 164Heating and fresh air system

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Heating or cooling the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Hydraulic Brake Assistautomatic hazard warning lights activa-

tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

IIdentification of the fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Identifying letters on the engine

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 217Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 217

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255identifying letters of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 107odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 110

Indications on the screendoors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 106Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194on-screen keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177update navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196changing the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175general panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198proximity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170scroll knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176scroll (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176search in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176sharing a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

361

Index

Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208verification boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 333Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106instructions shown on the screen . . . . . . . . . . 107instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 118use with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . 117

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . . 174Interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27ISOFIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

KKey-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Key by remote control

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Keyless Access

Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless Access locking and ignition systemsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keysreplacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 125vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Kick-downautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

LLaunch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 238Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 139

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . . 98interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141lighting of instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Load compartment in the luggage compart-

mentsee Loading the luggage compartment . . . 155

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 155Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

362

Index

Locking and unlockingin the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 16Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 155

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . 158manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17stowing the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156see also Loading the luggage compart-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Luggage compartment shelf

stowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 158

MMain beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Mediachanging the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193playback sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194playing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Mobile signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Motor

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Multi-function steering wheel

without voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Multifunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

NNatural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309, 312smell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200importing vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207points of interest (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201select the destination on the map . . . . . . . . 200split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204traffic reports (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Noises

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 326

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

OOctane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46One-touch opening and closing

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

363

Index

fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 136windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Operating malfunctionPark Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Outside temperature

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Overview

of the structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

PPark Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 284automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . 283exiting a parking space (only for parallel

spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 237with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Parking aidadjusting the display and audible warn-

ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 291automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287braking while manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 292rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 338towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 291

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 290

Parking assistanceparking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 273control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 290

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 290Particulate filter

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 64, 65, 66Passenger-side instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Preheating systemcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 336Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

RRadar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 261Radio

changing frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190information and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190memorise station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Radio DISPLAY: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

see Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Rear bulbs in the side panel

disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 136

364

Index

Rear lights in the rear liddisassemble the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Rear seat

folding down the backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Rear seat passengers

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 64, 65, 66Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Rear window wiper blades

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Refuelcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308gas gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . 149Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 233Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104, 112Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Roll-back function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Running in

brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

SSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . 22safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Safety instructions

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 81

Safety recommendationscoolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Saving fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Seatheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150removable covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Seat belt positionfor pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 72control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 74safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 73SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

data transmission and control functions . . . 187SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Selective catalytic reduction

see Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . . 313Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Serviceconditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334digital maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333fixed service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

365

Index

flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Service proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333sets of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Service Menu

identifying letters on the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 108restart oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Service warning: check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Set

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Smell of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Special characteristics

tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Special features

Lowering the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer .304Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Start-Stop system

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250switch the engine off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Start-Stop Systemdriver instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 248the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 218

after the fuel tank has run dry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 241

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Steering wheeladjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . 236

Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

of front door panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153storage pocket in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) . . . . . . 174Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . 31, 217

TTechnical data

roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Telephone

Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214display and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Temperature displayof the engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Tightening torque

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Time

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 233, 236Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 87Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

366

Index

Towingblind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Towing bracket

retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 87Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 303driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 292rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Trailer turn signalscontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Transporting itemsfastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Transporting objectsroof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Travel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Travel data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Turn signals

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Tyre Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 348Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyre repair kit

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326, 327, 329service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327with directional tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

UUnfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Unlocking and locking

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Unlocking manuallyrear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214connecting an external data storage de-

vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 130vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 323assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 323disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Vehicle carewindscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 61

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353367

Index

Vehicle documentation compartment . . . . . . . 153Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-

tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Vehicle paint

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Vehicle tools

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

WWarning lamps

engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

see also Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 118Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Washing the vehicle

external vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347What negatively affects driving safety? . . . . . . 63Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 348

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 329

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 348central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Wheel trimremoving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Windowselectric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 136

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . 87Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 145Windscreen washer water

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322filling amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Windscreen wiper bladesservice position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 145cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Winter conditionsbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Winter tyressizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

connecting an external audio source . . . . . . 197

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

368

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18


Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manualSEAT Arona

6F9012720BD

Ingl

és 6

F901

2720

BD (

11.18

)

SEA

T A

rona

Ing

lés

(11.18

)

Documents

(11.18) Owner’s manual Arona SEAT Arona SEAT · 2018-11-22 · Owner’s manual SEAT Arona 6F9012720BD Inglés 6F9012720BD (11.18) SEAT Arona Inglés (11.18)